Pacific Digital Stereo Receiver AVR 635 User Manual

AVR 635 Audio/VideoReceiver  
OWNER’S MANUAL  
®
Power for the Digital Revolution  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
Thank you for choosing Harman Kardon!  
With the purchase of a Harman Kardon AVR 635  
you are about to begin many years of listening  
enjoyment.  
Finally, the AVR is among the very few A/V  
receivers that offer decoding of MP3 data, so  
that you may listen to the latest music selections  
directly from compatible computers or playback  
devices with the power and fidelity you expect  
from Harman Kardon.  
The AVR is also featuring HDCD® decoding to  
provide the most realistic playback of CDs when  
a digital connection is used, even with a normal  
non-HDCD-compatible CD or DVD player.  
needed to accommodate tomorrow’s new for-  
mats right on board.  
The AVR 635’s flexibility and power extend  
beyond your main home theater or listening  
room. The AVR includes a sophisticated multi-  
zone control system that allows you to select  
one source for use in the main room and a dif-  
ferent one (Audio only) in a second room.  
Complete control over volume is possible with a  
separate infrared control link. To make it easy to  
operate the AVR from a remote room, a separate  
“Zone II” remote is included.  
Additional multiroom options include the option  
to assign two of the AVR’s output channels to the  
multiroom system and the ability to link the AVR  
to innovative A-BUS® keypads for multiroom oper-  
ation without the need for external amplifiers.  
Designed to provide all the excitement and detail  
of movie soundtracks and every nuance of musi-  
cal selections, the AVR 635 is truly a multichan-  
nel receiver for the new millennium. In addition  
to the traditional 5.1 digital decoding modes  
such as Dolby Digital and DTS, it offers the latest  
advancements in surround technology such as  
Dolby Pro Logic IIx, the full suite of DTS-ES 6.1  
modes, DTS Neo:6 and the latest 7.1 channel  
versions of Harman's own Logic 7 technology.  
An important addition to the AVR 635’s impres-  
sive list of features is EzSet/EQ,™ which auto-  
mates the configuration process to make it  
quicker, easier and more precise. Using the spe-  
cial microphone supplied with the unit, EzSet/EQ  
takes the guesswork out of entering speaker  
“size” and crossover information, delay times for  
all channels and output levels. In addition to the  
configuration settings, EzSet/EQ also includes  
room equalization so that the signals sent to  
each speaker are tailored to provide accurate  
sonic quality with your specific combination of  
speaker type, room size and other factors that  
influence room acoustics. With EzSet/EQ, your  
system is custom-configured in a few minutes  
with accuracy that previously required expensive  
and hard-to-use test equipment.  
The AVR 635 has been engineered so that it is  
easy to take advantage of all the power of its  
digital technology. To obtain the maximum  
enjoyment from your new receiver, we urge you  
to read this manual. A few minutes spent  
learning the functions of the various controls  
will enable you to take advantage of all the  
power the AVR is able to deliver.  
The AVR 635’s powerful amplifier uses traditional  
Harman Kardon high-current design technologies  
to meet the wide dynamic range of any program  
selection.  
Harman Kardon invented the high-fidelity  
receiver more than fifty years ago. With state-of-  
the-art circuitry and time-honored circuit designs,  
the AVR is the perfect combination of the latest in  
digital audio technology, a quiet yet powerful  
analog amplifier in an elegant, easy-to-use  
package.  
If you have any questions about this product, its  
installation or its operation, please contact your  
retailer or custom installer. They are your best  
local sources of information.  
Description and Features  
In tandem with EzSet/EQ, the AVR 635 includes a  
full set of manual configuration settings for  
those who wish to custom-trim their system even  
further. A Quadruple Crossover bass manage-  
ment system makes it possible to enter different  
crossover settings for each speaker group.  
The AVR 635 is among the most versatile and  
multifeatured A/V receivers available, incorporat-  
ing a wide range of listening options. In addition  
to Dolby Digital and DTS decoding for digital  
sources, a broad choice of surround modes for  
Matrix surround-encoded or Stereo recordings  
are available for use with sources such as CD,  
VCR, TV broadcasts and the AVR’s own FM/AM  
tuner. Along with Dolby Digital EX, DTS-ES®,  
Dolby Pro Logic IIx, DTS Neo:6, Dolby 3 Stereo,  
5 Channel or 7 Channel Stereo and Hall and  
Theater modes, the AVR 635 offers Harman  
International’s exclusive Logic 7 process in both  
5.1 and 7.1 versions to create a wider, more  
enveloping field environment and more defined  
fly-overs and pans. Although the AVR 635’s  
primary use will be in multichannel systems,  
advanced technology is at work even when only  
two speakers are used. Dolby Virtual Speaker is  
available to create enveloping sound fields from  
front left and right speakers, and the latest Dolby  
Headphone circuitry creates an amazing sense of  
openness with headphones.  
I Dolby* Digital, Dolby Digital EX and  
Dolby Pro Logic*IIx Decoding, and the  
full suite of DTS® modes, including  
DTS-ES® 6.1 Discrete & Matrix and  
Neo:6® and DTS 96/24  
Video connections and system integration is a  
snap with the AVR 635, thanks to format cross-  
conversion which allows any video input to be  
output as a high-quality component signal, com-  
plete with the AVR’s on-screen menus. For those  
sources already in component form, three assign-  
able, wide-bandwidth inputs are available, and  
the Video inputs are renameable. To further  
enhance the viewing experience with digital  
sources or displays, the AVR 635’s A/V Sync  
Delay feature allows you to compensate for the  
loss of lip sync due to digital video delays indi-  
vidually for each input. Full-carrier IR outputs, a  
bi-directional RS-232 port and a learning remote  
with a two-line display are among the many  
other features that make the AVR 635’s power  
simple to use.  
I Seven channels of high-current amplifi-  
cation with two channels assignable to  
either surround back or multiroom  
applications  
I Harman Kardon’s exclusive Logic 7®  
processing, along with a choice of  
Dolby Virtual Speaker processing for  
use when only two speakers are  
available  
I Dolby Headphone to create spacious,  
open sound fields when using head-  
phones  
I MP3 decoding for use with compatible  
computers and digital audio players  
I Harman Kardon’s advanced EzSet/EQ™  
automatically configures speaker set-  
tings and sets room equalization for  
quick, easy and accurate system setup  
Two-channel listening with analog sources is  
available with full bass management or in a tra-  
ditional “bypass” mode that creates a straight  
signal path from the gain stage to the volume  
control.  
Coax and optical digital outputs are available for  
direct connection to digital recorders, and both  
the front panel analog audio/video and coaxial  
digital jacks may be switched to outputs for use  
with portable recorders – a Harman Kardon  
exclusive. Two video recording outputs, preamp-  
out and a color-coded eight-channel input make  
the AVR virtually future-proof, with everything  
I High-bandwidth, HDTV-compatible com-  
ponent video switching  
, HDCD®, High Definition Compatible Digital® and Pacific Microsonicsare either registered trademarks or trademarks of Pacific Microsonics, Inc., in the United  
States and/or other countries. HDCD System manufactured under license from Pacific Microsonics, Inc.  
INTRODUCTION 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction / Safety Information  
I Precision video cross-conversion circuit-  
Installation Location  
Important Safety Information  
ry outputs any video input on the com-  
ponent outputs, complete with on-  
screen system menus  
I To assure proper operation and to avoid the  
potential for safety hazards, place the unit on  
a firm and level surface. When placing the  
unit on a shelf, be certain that the shelf and  
any mounting hardware can support the  
weight of the product.  
Verify Line Voltage Before Use  
Your AVR 635 has been designed for use with  
220-240-Volt AC current. Connection to a line  
voltage other than that for which it is intended  
can create a safety and fire hazard and may  
damage the unit.  
I Front panel analog A/V inputs, switch-  
able to outputs  
I Front panel digital inputs with coax  
digital output capability for easy con-  
nection to portable digital devices and  
the latest video game consoles  
I Make certain that proper space is provided  
both above and below the unit for ventilation.  
If this product will be installed in a cabinet or  
other enclosed area, make certain that there  
is sufficient air movement within the cabinet.  
Under some circumstances a fan may be  
required.  
If you have any questions about the voltage  
requirements for your specific model, or about  
the line voltage in your area, contact your dealer  
before plugging the unit into a wall outlet.  
I Multiple digital inputs and outputs  
I On-screen menu and display system  
Do Not Use Extension Cords  
To avoid safety hazards, use only the power cord  
attached to your unit. We do not recommend  
that extension cords be used with this product.  
As with all electrical devices, do not run power  
cords under rugs or carpets or place heavy  
objects on them. Damaged power cords should  
be replaced immediately by an authorized serv-  
ice depot with a cord meeting factory specifica-  
tions.  
I Extensive multiroom options, including  
a standard Zone II remote, assignable  
amplifier channels and A-BUS Ready®  
capability for listening to a separate  
source in a remote zone  
I Do not place the unit directly on a carpeted  
surface.  
I Avoid installation in extremely hot or cold  
locations, or an area that is exposed to direct  
sunlight or heating equipment.  
I 6-Channel/8-Channel Direct Input and  
Preamp Outputs for Easy Expansion and  
Use with Future Audio Formats  
I Avoid moist or humid locations.  
I Do not obstruct the ventilation slots on the  
top of the unit, or place objects directly over  
them.  
I Extensive bass management options,  
6/8-channel direct inputs for use with  
DVD-Audio or SACD players, including  
Quadruple Crossover and individual  
settings for each input  
Handle the AC Power Cord Gently  
When disconnecting the power cord from an AC  
outlet, always pull the plug, never pull the cord.  
If you do not intend to use the unit for any  
considerable length of time, disconnect the plug  
from the AC outlet.  
Cleaning  
When the unit gets dirty, wipe it with a clean,  
soft, dry cloth. If necessary, wipe it with a soft  
cloth dampened with mild soapy water, then a  
fresh cloth with clean water. Wipe dry immedi-  
ately with a dry cloth. NEVER use benzene,  
aerosol cleaners, thinner, alcohol or any other  
volatile cleaning agent. Do not use abrasive  
cleaners, as they may damage the finish of metal  
parts. Avoid spraying insecticide near the unit.  
I A/V Sync delay adjustable for each  
input delivers perfect lip sync with  
digital programs or video displays  
Do Not Open the Cabinet  
There are no user-serviceable components inside  
this product. Opening the cabinet may present a  
shock hazard, and any modification to the prod-  
uct will void your guarantee. If water or any  
metal object such as a paper clip, wire or a  
staple accidentally falls inside the unit, discon-  
nect it from the AC power source immediately,  
and consult an authorized service station.  
I Main Backlit Remote with Internal  
Codes and Learning Capability  
I HDCD Decoding for Superb  
CD Playback  
Moving the Unit  
Before moving the unit, be certain to disconnect  
any interconnection cords with other compo-  
nents, and make certain that you disconnect the  
unit from the AC outlet.  
Unpacking  
The carton and shipping materials used to pro-  
tect your new receiver during shipment were  
specially designed to cushion it from shock and  
vibration. We suggest that you save the carton  
and packing materials for use in shipping if you  
move, or should the unit ever need repair.  
To minimize the size of the carton in storage,  
you may wish to flatten it. This is done by care-  
fully slitting the tape seams on the bottom and  
collapsing the carton. Other cardboard inserts  
may be stored in the same manner. Packing  
materials that cannot be collapsed should be  
saved along with the carton in a plastic bag.  
If you do not wish to save the packaging materi-  
als, please note that the carton and other sec-  
tions of the shipping protection are recyclable.  
Please respect the environment and discard  
those materials at a local recycling center.  
4 INTRODUCTION / SAFETY INFORMATION  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Front Panel Controls  
Ò
ı
¯
˜
Ú
ˆ
AVR 635  
3
9
)
!
#
%
( ^  
58 6 Ù Û &  
7 @ $  
U * Ó  
( Ô  
2 1  
4
Main Power Switch  
System Power Control  
Power Indicator  
Headphone Jack  
Surround Mode Group Selector  
Speaker Selector  
Set Button  
Preset Station Selector  
Surround Mode Indicators  
Speaker/Channel Input Indicators  
Digital Select Button  
Channel Select Button  
Volume Control  
Input Indicators  
Main Information Display  
Remote Sensor Window  
EzSet/EQ Microphone Jacks  
1
@
#
$
%
^
&
*
(
Ó
Ô
Ò
Ú
Û
Ù
ı
ˆ
˜
¯
˘
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
)
!
Button  
Input Source Selector  
RDS Selector  
Delay Adjust Selector  
Digital Optical 4 Input  
Input/Output Status Indicators  
Digital Coax 4 Jack  
Video 4 Input/Output Jacks  
Front Panel Control Door  
Button  
Tone Mode  
Surround Mode Selector  
Tuning Selector  
Tuner Band Selector  
1
Main Power Switch: Press this button to  
4
Headphone Jack: This jack may be used to  
6
Speaker Selector: Press this button to  
apply power to the AVR. When the switch is  
pressed in, the unit is placed in a Standby  
listen to the AVR’s output through a pair of head-  
phones. Be certain that the headphones have a  
standard 6.3 mm stereo phone plug. Note that  
the main room speakers and all Preamp  
begin the process of configuring the AVR for the  
type of speakers it is being used with. For com-  
plete information on configuring the speaker set-  
tings using the front-panel controls see page 27.  
mode, as indicated by the orange LED  
3
surrounding the System Power Control  
2
.
This button MUST be pressed in to operate the  
unit. To turn the unit off completely and prevent  
the use of the remote control, this switch  
should be pressed until it pops out from the  
front panel so that the word “OFF” may be  
read at the top of the switch.  
Outputs  
when the headphone jack is in use.  
b
will automatically be turned off  
7
Button: When an adjustment is being  
or Digital  
buttons, this button may be pressed  
to scroll through the available options.  
made using the Channel Select  
Select  
Ù
5
Surround Mode Group Selector: Press this  
Û
button to select the top-level group of surround  
modes. Each press of the button will select a  
major mode grouping in the following order:  
8
Tone Mode: Pressing this button enables or  
NOTE: This switch is normally left in the “ON”  
position.  
disables the Balance, Bass and Treble tone  
controls. When the button is pressed so that the  
words TONEINappear in the Main Infor-  
Dolby Modes DTS Digital Modes DSP  
Modes Stereo Modes Logic 7 Modes  
2
System Power Control: When the Main  
Once the button is pressed so that the name of  
the desired surround mode group appears in the  
on-screen display and in the Lower Display Line  
mation Display  
˜, the settings of the Bass  
Power Switch is “ON,” press this button to  
1
and Treble controls and of the Balance control  
will affect the output signals. When the button is  
pressed so that the words TONEOUTappear  
turn on the AVR; press it again to turn the unit  
off (to Standby). Note that the Power Indicator  
˜, press the Surround Mode Selector  
9
to  
surrounding the switch  
the unit is on.  
3
will turn blue when  
cycle through the individual modes available. For  
example, press this button to select Dolby modes,  
and then press the Surround Mode Selector  
in the Main Information Display  
˜, the  
output signal will be “flat,” without any balance,  
bass or treble alteration, no matter how the  
actual Controls are adjusted. (For more infor-  
mation, see page 22).  
3
Power Indicator: This LED will be  
9
to choose from the various mode options.  
illuminated in orange when the unit is in the  
Standby mode to signal that the unit is ready to  
be turned on. When the unit is in operation, the  
indicator will turn blue.  
FRONT PANEL CONTROLS 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Front Panel Controls  
9
Surround Mode Selector: Press this  
^RDS Select Button: Press this button to dis-  
play the various messages that are part of the RDS  
data system of the AVR’s tuner. (See page 45 for  
more information on RDS).  
Ú
Speaker/Channel Input Indicators: These  
button to cycle through the individual surround  
modes available after the Surround Mode  
Group Selector  
above). Note that depending on the type of  
input, some modes are not always available. (See  
page 36 for more information about surround  
modes).  
indicators are multipurpose, indicating either the  
speaker type selected for each channel or the  
incoming data-signal configuration. The left, center,  
right, right surround and left surround speaker  
indicators are composed of three boxes, while the  
subwoofer is a single box. The center box lights  
when a “Small” speaker is selected, and the two  
outer boxes light when “Large” speakers are  
selected. When none of the boxes are lit for the  
center, surround or subwoofer channels, no speaker  
has been selected for that position. (See page 27  
for more information on configuring speakers.) The  
letters inside each of the center boxes display  
active input channels. For standard analog inputs,  
only the L and R will light, indicating a stereo  
input. When a digital source is playing, the indica-  
tors will light to display the channels begin  
received at the digital input. When the letters  
flash, the digital input has been interrupted. (See  
page 38 for more information on the Channel  
Indicators).  
5
was pressed (see item  
5
&Delay Adjust Selector: Press this button to  
begin the process of adjusting the delay settings  
for Dolby surround modes. See page 29 for more  
information on delay adjustments.  
)
Tuning Selector: Press the left side of the  
*
Digital Optical 4 Input: Connect the optical  
button to tune lower frequency stations and the  
right side of the button to tune higher frequency  
stations. When a station with a strong signal is  
reached, MANUALTUNEDor AUTO  
TUNEDwill appear in the Main Information  
Display  
digital audio output of an audio or video product  
to this jack. When the Input is not in use, be  
certain to keep the plastic cap installed to avoid  
dust contamination that might degrade future  
performance.  
˜
(see page 44 for more information  
on tuning stations).  
(
Input/Output Status Indicators: These  
LED indicators will normally light green to show  
that the front panel Video 4 A/V jacks or the  
Coaxial 4 digital jack is operating as an  
!
Tuner Band Selector: Pressing this button  
Ô
will automatically switch the AVR to the Tuner  
mode. Pressing it again will switch between the  
AM and FM frequency bands, holding it pressed  
for some seconds will switch between stereo and  
mono receiving and between automatic and  
manual tuning mode (See page 44 for more  
information on the tuner).  
Ó
input. When either of these jacks has been con-  
figured for use as an output, the indicator will  
turn red to show that the jack may be used for  
recording. (See page 39 for more information on  
configuring the front panel jacks as outputs,  
rather than inputs.)  
Û
Digital Select Button: When playing a  
source that has a digital output, press this button  
to select between the Optical *Wand  
Coaxial ÓXDigital inputs (See page 36 for  
more information).  
@
Set Button: When making choices during  
Ó
Digital Coax 4 Jack: This jack is normally  
the setup and configuration process, press this  
button to enter the desired setting as shown in  
the Main Information Display  
used for connection to the output of portable  
audio devices, video game consoles or other  
products that have a coax digital jack. It may  
also be configured as an output jack, to feed a  
digital signal to a CD-R, MiniDisc or other digital  
recording device. (See page 21 for information  
on configuring the Digital Coax 4 Jack to an  
output.)  
Ù
Channel Select Button: Press this button  
˜
into the  
to begin the process of trimming the channel  
output levels using an external audio source.  
(For more information on output level trim  
adjustment, see page 40).  
AVR’s memory.  
#
Preset Stations Selector: Press this  
button to scroll up or down through the list of  
stations that have been entered into the preset  
memory. (See page 44 for more information on  
tuner programming.)  
ı
Volume Control: Turn this knob clockwise  
to increase the volume, counterclockwise to  
decrease the volume. If the AVR is muted,  
adjusting volume control will automatically  
release the unit from the silenced condition.  
Ô
Video 4 Input/Output Jacks: These  
$
Button: When an adjustment is being  
or Digital  
buttons, this button may be pressed  
to scroll through the available options.  
audio/video jacks may be used for temporary  
connection to video games or portable audio/  
video products such as camcorders and portable  
audio players. They may also be configured as  
output jacks (also S-Video) to feed a signal to  
any recording Audio or Video device (see page 39  
for more information).  
made using the Channel Select  
Select  
Ù
Û
ˆ
Input indicators: The current selected  
mode or function will appear as one of these  
indicators. Note that when the unit is turned on,  
the entire list of available modes will light briefly,  
and then revert to normal operation with only  
the active mode indicator illuminated.  
%
Input Source Selector: Press this button to  
change the input by scrolling through the list of  
input sources.  
Front-Panel Control Door: To open the  
door so that the front-panel jacks and controls  
behind this door may be accessed, gently pull the  
door down and towards you using either upper  
corner of the door.  
˜
Main Information Display: This display  
delivers messages and status indications to help  
you operate the receiver.  
¯
Remote Sensor Window: The sensor  
Ò
Surround Mode Indicators: The current  
behind this window receives infrared signals from  
the remote control. Aim the remote at this area  
and do not block or cover it unless an external  
remote sensor is installed.  
selected mode or function will appear as one of  
these indicators. Note that when the unit is  
turned on, the entire list of available modes will  
light briefly, and then revert to normal operation  
with only the active mode indicator illuminated.  
˘
EzSet/EQ Microphone Jack: Before  
starting the EzSet/EQ automated setup process,  
plug the microphone into this jack. The  
microphone does not need to be plugged in at  
other times.  
6 FRONT PANEL CONTROLS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Rear Panel Connections  
W X  
Z 3  
6 7  
V A  
M O  
g N  
J
f
R
P C  
Q
Y
9 a U  
2 5  
d
L
K S  
T
B
~230V/50Hz  
230 V/50Hz  
0 1 b  
4
8
F
D
e
E
c
I
G H  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
AM Antenna  
FM Antenna  
Tape Inputs  
Tape Outputs  
Subwoofer Output  
DVD Audio Inputs  
CD Inputs  
Multiroom Outputs  
A-BUS Connector  
8-Channel Direct Inputs  
Digital Audio Outputs  
Video Monitor Outputs  
DVD Video Inputs  
Surround Speaker Outputs  
Switched AC Accessory Outlet  
Unswitched AC Accessory Outlet  
AC Power Cord Jack  
Video 2 Component Video Inputs  
Component Video Outputs  
Video 1 Component Video Inputs  
Remote IR Output  
Remote IR Input  
Multiroom IR Input  
Video 1 Video Outputs  
Video 1 Video Inputs  
Video 2 Video Outputs  
Video 3 Video Inputs  
Optical Digital Inputs  
Coaxial Digital Inputs  
Video 2 Audio Outputs  
Video 2 Audio Inputs  
Video 3 Audio Inputs  
Video 1 Audio Inputs  
Video 1 Audio Outputs  
Preamp Outputs  
Surround Back/Multiroom Speaker Outputs  
RS-232 Port  
Fan Vents  
DVD Component Video Inputs  
Remote IR Carrier Output  
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
Front Speaker Outputs  
Center Speaker Outputs  
Video 2 Video Inputs  
NOTE: To assist in making the correct connec-  
tions for multichannel input/output and speaker  
connections, all connection jacks and terminals  
have been color coded in conformance with the  
latest CEA standards as follows:  
1
FM Antenna: Connect the supplied indoor or  
8
A-BUS Connector: Connect this jack to an  
an optional external FM antenna to this terminal.  
optional A-BUS-certified remote room keypad or  
amplifier to extend the multiroom capabilities of  
your AVR. See page 18 for more information on  
A-BUS.  
2
Tape Inputs: Connect these jacks to the  
PLAY/OUT jacks of an audio recorder.  
Front Left:  
Front Right:  
Center:  
White  
Red  
Green  
Blue  
Gray  
Brown  
Tan  
Purple  
Orange  
Yellow  
3
Tape Outputs: Connect these jacks to the  
9
8-Channel Direct Inputs: These jacks are  
RECORD/INPUT jacks of an audio recorder.  
used for connection to source devices such as  
DVD-Audio or SACD players with discrete analog  
outputs. Depending on the source device in use,  
all eight jacks may be used, though in many  
cases only connections to the front left/right,  
center, surround left/right and LFE (subwoofer  
input) jacks will be used for standard 5.1 audio  
signals.  
4
Subwoofer Output: Connect this jack to  
Surround Left:  
Surround Right:  
Surround Back Left:  
Surround Back Right:  
Subwoofer (LFE):  
Digital Audio:  
Composite Video:  
Component Video “Y”: Green  
Component Video “Pr”: Red  
Component Video “Pb”: Blue  
the line-level input of a powered subwoofer. If an  
external subwoofer amplifier is used, connect this  
jack to the subwoofer amplifier input.  
5
DVD Audio Inputs: Connect these jacks to  
the analog audio jacks on a DVD or other audio  
or video source.  
A
Digital Audio Outputs: Connect these  
6
CD Inputs: Connect these jacks to the  
jacks to the matching digital input connector on  
a digital recorder such as a CD-R or MiniDisc  
recorder.  
analog output of a compact disc player or CD  
changer or any other audio source.  
0
AM Antenna: Connect the AM loop antenna  
7
Multiroom Outputs: Connect these jacks  
supplied with the receiver to these terminals. If an  
external AM antenna is used, make connections to  
the AM and GND terminals in accordance with  
the instructions supplied with the antenna.  
to an optional audio power amplifier to listen to  
the source selected by the multiroom system in a  
remote room.  
REAR PANEL CONNECTIONS 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Rear Panel Connections  
B
Video Monitor Outputs: Connect this jack  
H
Unswitched AC Accessory Outlet: This  
O
Multiroom IR Input: Connect the output of  
to the composite and/or S-Video input of a TV  
monitor or video projector to view the on-screen  
menus and the output of any standard Video or  
S-Video source selected by the receiver’s video  
switcher.  
outlet may be used to power any AC device. The  
power will remain on at this outlet regardless of  
whether the AVR is on or off.  
an IR sensor in a remote room to this jack to  
operate the AVR’s multiroom control system.  
P
Video 1 Video Outputs: Connect these  
Note: The total power consumption of all  
devices connected to the accessory outlets  
should not exceed 100 watts from the  
jacks to the RECORD/INPUT composite or  
S-Video jack on a VCR.  
C
DVD Video Inputs: Connect these jacks to  
Q
Video 1 Video Inputs: Connect these jacks  
the composite or S-Video output jacks on a DVD  
player or other video source.  
Unswitched Outlet  
Switched Outlet  
Hand 50 W from the  
to the PLAY/OUT composite or S-Video jacks on  
a VCR or other video source.  
G
.
D
Front Speaker Outputs: Connect these  
I
AC Power Cord Jack: Connect the AC  
R
Video 2 Video Outputs: Connect these  
outputs to the matching + or – terminals on  
your left and right speakers. In conformance with  
the new CEA color code specification, the White  
terminal is the positive, or "+" terminal that  
should be connected to the red (+) terminal on  
Front Left speaker with the older color coding,  
while the Red terminal is the positive, or "+"  
terminal that should be connected to the red (+)  
terminal on Front Right speaker. Connect the  
black (–) terminals on the AVR to the black (–)  
terminals on the speakers. See page 15 for more  
information on speaker polarity.  
power cord to this jack when the installation is  
complete. To ensure safe operation, use only the  
power cord supplied with the unit. If a replace-  
ment is required it must be of the same type and  
capacity.  
jacks to the RECORD/INPUT composite or  
S-Video jacks on a second VCR.  
S
Video 3 Video Inputs: Connect these jacks  
to the PLAY/OUT composite or S-Video jacks on  
any video source.  
J
Component Video 2 Inputs: These inputs  
T
Video 2 Video Inputs: Connect these jacks  
may be used with any video source device  
equipped with analog Y/Pr/Pb or RGB com-  
ponent video outputs. The factory default is for  
these jacks to be a linked to the Video 2 input,  
but you may change the setting at any time  
through the IN/OUTSETUPmenu. See  
page 15 for more information on configuring the  
component video inputs.  
to the PLAY/OUT composite or S-Video jacks on  
a second VCR or other video source.  
U
Optical Digital Inputs: Connect the  
optical digital output from a DVD player, HDTV  
receiver, the S/PDIF output of a compatible com-  
puter sound card playing MP3 files or streams,  
LD player, MD player or CD player to these jacks.  
The signal may be either a Dolby Digital signal, a  
DTS signal, a 2 channel MPEG 1 signal, an MP3  
or HDCD data stream or a standard PCM digital  
source.  
E
Center Speaker Outputs: Connect these  
outputs to the matching + and – terminals on  
your center channel speaker. In conformance  
with the new CEA color code specification, the  
Green Terminal is the positive, or "+" terminal  
that should be connected to the red (+) terminal  
on speakers with the older color coding. Connect  
the black (–) terminal on the AVR to the black  
negative (–) terminal on your speaker. (See page  
15 for more information on speaker polarity.)  
K
Monitor Component Video Outputs:  
Connect these outputs to the component video  
inputs of a video projector or monitor. When a  
source connected to one of the two  
Component Video Inputs JLis selected  
the signal will be sent to these jacks.  
V
Coaxial Digital Inputs: Connect the coax  
digital output from a DVD player, HDTV receiver,  
the S/PDIF output of a compatible computer  
sound card playing MP3 files or streams, LD  
player, MD player or CD player to these jacks.  
The signal may be either a Dolby Digital signal,  
DTS signal, a 2 channel MPEG 1 signal, an MP3  
or HDCD data stream or a standard PCM digital  
source. Do not connect the RF digital output of  
an LD player to these jacks.  
L
Component Video 1 Inputs: These inputs  
F
Surround Speaker Outputs: Connect  
may be used with any source device equipped  
with analog Y/Pr/Pb or RGB component video  
outputs. The factory default is for these jacks to  
be a linked to the Video 1 input, but you may  
change the setting at any time through the  
IN/OUTSETUPmenu. See page 15 for  
more information on configuring the component  
video inputs.  
these outputs to the matching + and – terminals  
on your surround channel speakers. In confor-  
mance with the new CEA color code specifica-  
tion, the Blue terminal is the positive, or "+"  
terminal that should be connected to the red (+)  
terminal on the Surround Left speaker with older  
color coding, while the Gray terminal should be  
connected to the red (+) terminal on the  
Surround Right speaker with the older color cod-  
ing. Connect the black (–) terminal on the AVR  
to the matching black negative (–) terminals for  
each surround speaker. (See page 15 for more  
information on speaker polarity.)  
W
Video 2 Audio Outputs: Connect these  
jacks to the RECORD/INPUT audio jacks on a  
VCR or any Audio recorder.  
Note: All component inputs/outputs can be  
used for RGB signals too, in the same way as  
described for the Y/Pr/Pb signals, then connected  
to the jacks with the corresponding color.  
RGB connection is not possible if the source out-  
puts a separate sync signal (see page 16).  
X
Video 2 Audio Inputs: Connect these jacks  
to the PLAY/OUT audio jacks on a second VCR  
or other audio or video source.  
Y
Video 3 Audio Inputs: Connect these jacks  
G
Switched AC Accessory Outlet: This out-  
M
Remote IR Output: This connection permits  
to the PLAY/OUT audio jacks on any audio or  
video source.  
let may be used to power any device that you  
wish to have turn on when the AVR is turned on  
the IR sensor in the receiver to serve other  
remote controlled devices. Connect this jack to  
the “IR IN” jack on Harman Kardon or other  
compatible equipment.  
with the System Power Control switch  
2.  
Z
Video 1 Audio Inputs: Connect these jacks  
to the PLAY/OUT audio jacks on a VCR or other  
audio or video source.  
N
Remote IR Input: If the AVR’s front-panel  
a
Video 1 Audio Outputs: Connect these  
IR sensor is blocked due to cabinet doors or  
other obstructions, an external IR sensor may  
be used. Connect the output of the sensor to  
this jack.  
jacks to the RECORD/INPUT audio jacks on  
a VCR or any other Audio recorder.  
8 REAR PANEL CONNECTIONS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Rear Panel Connections  
b
Preamp Outputs: Connect these jacks to  
d
RS-232 Port: This jack may be used to con-  
an optional, external power amplifier for appli-  
cations where higher power is desired.  
trol the AVR 635 over a bi-directional RS-232  
serial control link to a compatible computer or  
programmable remote control system. Due to  
the complexity of programming RS-232 com-  
mands we strongly recommend that connections  
to this port for control purposes be made by a  
trained and qualified technician. This jack may  
also link to a compatible computer to upgrade  
the software and operating system of the  
AVR 635 when appropriate upgrades are  
available.  
c
Surround Back/Multiroom Speaker  
Outputs: These speaker terminals are normally  
used to power the surround back left/surround  
back right speakers in a 7.1 channel system.  
However, they may also be used to power the  
speakers in a second zone, which will receive the  
output selected for a multiroom system.  
To change the output fed to these terminals  
from the default of the Surround Back speakers  
to the Multiroom Output, you must change a  
setting in the Multiroom Menu of the OSD sys-  
tem. See page 42 for more information on con-  
figuring this speaker output. In normal surround  
system use, the brown and black terminals are  
the surround back left channel positive (+) and  
negative (–) connections and the tan and black  
terminals are the surround back right positive  
(+) and negative (–) terminals.  
e
Fan Vents: These ventilation holes are the  
output of the AVR’s airflow system. To ensure  
proper operation of the unit and to avoid possi-  
ble damage to delicate surfaces, make certain  
that these holes are not blocked and that there  
is at least three inches of open space between  
the vent holes and any wooden or fabric surface.  
f
DVD Component Video Inputs: These  
inputs may be used with any source device  
equipped with analog Y/Pr/Pb or RGB compo-  
nent video outputs. The factory default is for  
these jacks to be a linked to the DVD input, but  
you may change the setting at any time through  
the IN/OUTSETUPmenu. See page 15 for  
more information on configuring the component  
video inputs.  
For multiroom use, connect the brown and black  
SBL terminals to the red and black connections  
on the left remote zone speaker and connect the  
tan and black SBR terminals to the red and black  
terminals on the right remote zone speaker.  
g
Remote IR Carrier Output: The output of  
this jack is the full signal received at the  
Remote Sensor Window or input through  
the Remote IR Input including the carrier  
frequency that is removed from signals at the  
Remote IR Output . Use this output to  
¯
N
M
extend IR remote signals to the input of  
compatible products by direct connection or  
through the use of optional, external IR  
“blasters”. If you are in doubt as to which of the  
two IR Output jacks to use, we recommend that  
you consult with your dealer or installer, or check  
with the manufacturer of the external equipment  
you wish to control.  
REAR PANEL CONNECTIONS 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Main Remote Control Functions  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
Power Off Button  
IR Transmitter Window  
LCD Information Display  
Power On Button  
Input Selectors  
1
g
0
MUTE  
3
4
AVR Selector  
AM/FM Tuner Select  
6-Channel/8-Channel Direct Input  
Test Button  
Sleep Button  
Surround Mode Selector  
Night Mode  
Channel Select Button  
Dim Button  
Navigation Button  
Set Button  
Digital Select  
Numeric Keys  
Tuner Mode  
Direct Button  
Tuning Up/Down  
OSD Button  
Dolby Mode Select Button  
DTS Digital Mode Selector  
Logic 7 Mode Select Button  
Transport Controls  
Light Button  
Skip Up/Down Buttons  
Stereo Mode Select Button  
DTS Neo:6 Mode Select  
Macro Buttons  
RDS Selector Button  
Preset Up/Down  
Clear Button  
Memory Button  
Delay/Prev. Ch.  
Program Button  
Speaker Select  
Multiroom  
Volume Up/Down  
Video Input Button  
Channel Up/Down Selector  
Mute  
2
5
7
M
T
N
S
8
O
A
J
X
I
H
D
Y
b
P
C
G
E
F
Z
f
d
Tone Control Button  
P
NOTE: The function names shown here are each  
button’s feature when used with the AVR. Most  
buttons have additional functions when used  
with other devices.  
P
W
R
e
a
c
6
The jack on the upper right side of the remote is  
reserved for future use. Do not remove the plug  
provided or connect any device to the jack.  
K
V
Q
B
L
9
U
10 MAIN REMOTE CONTROL FUNCTIONS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Main Remote Control Functions  
IMPORTANT NOTE: The AVR 635’s remote may  
be programmed to control up to seven devices,  
including the AVR. Before using the remote, it is  
important to remember to press the Input  
6
AM/FM Tuner Select: Press this button to  
select the AVR’s tuner as the listening choice.  
Pressing this button when the tuner is in use will  
select between the AM and FM bands.  
will go completely dark. Note that this setting is  
temporary; regardless of any changes, the display  
will always return to full brightness when the  
AVR is turned on. The blue illumination around  
Selector button  
4
that corresponds to the  
the Standby/On Button  
1
will always remain  
7
6-Channel/8 Channel Direct Input:  
unit you wish to operate. In addition, the AVR’s  
remote is shipped from the factory to operate the  
AVR and most Harman Kardon CD or DVD play-  
ers and cassette decks. The remote is also capa-  
ble of operating a wide variety of other products  
using the control codes that are part of the  
remote or by learning commands from other  
remotes. Before using the remote with other  
products, follow the instructions on pages 46-49  
to program the proper codes for the products in  
your system.  
at full brightness regardless of the setting to  
remind you that the AVR is still turned on. The  
blue accent lighting inside the volume control  
will also remain at full brightness when the  
panel is at 50%, but go out when the panel  
lights are fully dimmed.  
Press this button to select the device connected  
to the 6-Channel Direct Inputs or the  
8-Channel Direct Inputs  
available will depend on the selection 5.1 or  
6.1/7.1 made in the surround mode setting,  
see page 24 for more information).  
9
(the input  
E
Navigation Button: This single disc-like  
8
Test Tone: Press this button to begin the  
button is used to change or scroll through items  
in the on-screen menus or on the front panel or  
to make configuration settings such as digital  
inputs or delay timing. When changing a setting,  
first press the button for the function or setting  
to be changed (e.g., press the Digital Select  
sequence used to calibrate the AVR’s output lev-  
els. (See page 27 for more information on calibrat-  
ing the AVR.)  
It is also important to remember that many of  
the buttons on the remote take on different  
functions, depending on the product selected  
9
Sleep Button: Press this button to place  
the unit in the Sleep mode. After the time shown  
in the display, the AVR will automatically go into  
the Standby mode. Each press of the button  
changes the time until turn-off in the following  
order:  
Button  
G
to change a digital input) and then  
using the Input Selector Button  
4
. The  
press one of these buttons to scroll through the  
list of options or to increase or decrease a set-  
ting. The sections in this manual describing the  
individual features and functions contain specific  
information on using these buttons for each  
application.  
descriptions shown here primarily detail the  
functions of the remote when it is used to  
operate the AVR.  
90  
min  
80  
min  
70  
min  
60  
min  
50  
min  
0
Power Off Button: Press this button to  
40  
min  
30  
min  
20  
min  
10  
min  
OFF  
place the AVR or a selected device unit in the  
Standby mode. Note that when the AVR is  
switched off this will turn off the main room  
functions, but if the Multiroom system is activated,  
it will continue to function.  
F
Set Button: This button is used to enter  
Hold the button pressed for two seconds to turn  
off the Sleep mode setting.  
Note that this button is also used to change  
channels on your TV, VCR and Sat receiver when  
the appropriate source is selected, using the  
settings into the AVR’s memory. It is also used in  
the setup procedures for delay time, speaker con-  
figuration and channel output level adjustment.  
1
IR Transmitter Window: Point this window  
G
Digital Select: Press this button to assign  
device Input Selectors  
4.  
towards the AVR when pressing buttons on the  
remote to make certain that infrared commands  
are properly received.  
one of the digital inputs UV*Óto a source.  
(See page 37 for more information on using  
digital inputs.)  
A
Surround Mode Selector: Press this but-  
ton to select any of the HALL, THEATER surround  
modes. Note that depending on the type of  
input, some modes are not always available. (See  
page 33 for more information about surround  
modes.) Note that this button is also used to  
tune channels on your TV, VCR and Sat receiver  
when the appropriate source is selected using  
2
LCD Information Display: This two-line  
H
Numeric Keys: These buttons serve as a  
screen displays various information depending  
on the commands that have been entered into  
the remote.  
ten-button numeric keypad to enter tuner preset  
positions. They are also used to select channel  
numbers when TV, VCR or Sat receiver has  
been selected on the remote, or to select track  
numbers on a CD, DVD or LD player, depending  
on how the remote has been programmed.  
3
Power On Button: Press this button to turn  
on the power to a device selected by pressing one  
of the Input Selectors (except Tape).  
the device Input Selector  
4.  
4
B
Night Mode: Press this button to activate  
I
Tuner Mode: Press this button when the  
4
Input Selectors: Pressing one of these  
the Night mode. This mode is available only with  
Dolby Digital encoded sources, and it preserves  
dialog (center channel) intelligibilty at low vol-  
ume levels (See page 23 for more information).  
tuner is in use to select between automatic  
tuning and manual tuning. When the button is  
pressed so MANUALappears in the Main  
buttons will perform three actions at the same  
time. First, if the AVR is not turned on, this will  
power up the unit. Next, it will select the source  
shown on the button as the input to the AVR.  
Finally, it will change the remote control so that  
it controls the device selected. After pressing one  
of these buttons you must press the AVR  
Information Display  
˜, pressing the Tuning  
buttons will move the frequency up or  
K
)
C
Channel Select Button: This button is  
down in single-step increments. When the FM  
band is in use and AUTOappears in the Main  
used to start the process of setting the AVR’s  
output levels with an external source. Once this  
⁄ ¤  
Information Display  
˜, pressing this button  
button is pressed, use the  
/
buttons  
E
to  
Selector button  
functions with the remote.  
5
again to operate the AVR’s  
will change to monaural reception making even  
week stations audible. (See page 44 for more  
information.)  
select the channel being adjusted, then press the  
Set button  
E
⁄ ¤  
/
F
, followed by the  
buttons  
5
AVR Selector: Pressing this button will  
again, to change the level setting. (See page  
switch the remote so that it will operate the AVR’s  
functions. If the AVR is in the Standby mode, it will  
also turn the AVR on.  
40 for more information.)  
J
Direct Button: Press this button when the  
tuner is in use to start the sequence for direct  
entry of a station’s frequency. After pressing the  
button simply press the proper Numeric Keys  
D
Dim Button: Press this button to activate  
the Dimmer function, which reduces the bright-  
ness of the front-panel display, or turns it off  
entirely. Press the button once to change the dis-  
play to reduce the brightness by 50%, and press  
it again within five seconds and the main display  
H
to select a station (See page 44 for more  
information on the tuner).  
MAIN REMOTE CONTROL FUNCTIONS 11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Main Remote Control Functions  
K
Tuning Up/Down: When the tuner is in use,  
S
Stereo Mode Selector: Press this button  
Z
Delay Select Button: This button selects  
these buttons will tune up or down through the  
selected frequency band. If the Tuner Mode but-  
to select a stereo playback mode. When the but-  
ton is pressed so that DSPSURROFF  
adjustments to the A/V Sync Delay and the indi-  
vidual channel displays. The first press of the but-  
ton displays an A/VSYNCDELAYmessage  
ton  
I
has been pressed or the Band button  
appears in the Main Information Display  
˜,  
!
on the front panel was held pressed so that  
the AVR will operate in a bypass mode with true  
fully analog, two-channel left/right stereo mode  
with no surround processing or bass manage-  
ment as opposed to other modes where digital  
processing is used. When the button is pressed  
so that SURROUNDOFFappears in the  
in the Lower Display Line  
˜
and in the on-  
AUTOappears in the Main Information  
Display , pressing either of the buttons will  
cause the tuner to seek the next station with  
acceptable signal strength for quality reception.  
When the MANUALappears in the Main  
screen display, which means that you may  
change the amount of time that all channels are  
delayed together behind the video. This enables  
you to compensate for the loss of lip sync that  
may be caused by digital video processing in  
your display or by television stations. To change  
˜
Information Display  
˜, pressing these but-  
Main Information Display  
˜, you may enjoy  
tons will tune stations in single-step increments.  
(See page 44 for more information.)  
a two-channel presentation of the sound along  
with the benefits of bass management. When  
the button is pressed so that 5CHSTEREO  
or 7CHSTEREOappears, the stereo signal  
is routed to all five speakers, if installed. (See  
page 24 for more information on stereo playback  
modes).  
the A/V Sync Delay, press the Set Button  
F
while the A/VSYNCDELAYmessage is  
¤
/
visible and then use the  
Navigation  
L
OSD Button: Press this button to activate  
Button to change the setting so that the  
E
the On Screen Display (OSD) system used to set  
up or adjust the AVR’s parameters.  
sound and the video image are in sync. To  
change the delay for an individual output chan-  
⁄ ¤  
nel, press the  
/
Navigation Button  
E
M
Dolby Mode Selector: This button is used  
until the desired channel name is shown, and  
to select one of the available Dolby Surround  
processing modes. Each press of this button will  
select one of the Dolby Pro Logic II modes, Dolby  
3 Stereo or Dolby Digital. Note that the Dolby  
Digital mode is only available with a digital input  
selected and the other modes only as long as a  
Dolby Digital source is not playing (except Pro  
Logic II with Dolby Digital 2.0 recordings, see  
Note on page 7). See page 23 for the available  
Dolby surround mode options.  
T
DTS Neo:6 Mode Selector: Pressing this  
⁄ ¤  
then press the Set Button  
Navigation Buttons  
F
. Use the  
/
selector button cycles the AVR through the  
various DTS Neo:6 modes, which extract a five-  
or seven-channel surround field from two-chan-  
nel program material (from PCM source or ana-  
log input signal). The first press selects the last  
DTS Neo:6 surround mode that was in use, and  
each subsequent press selects the next mode in  
the following order:  
E
to change the delay  
amount. (See page 29 for more information on  
delay options.)  
a
Program Button: This button is used to  
begin the process of programming the remote.  
Press and hold this button for three seconds to  
place the remote in the programming mode.  
Once the red LED under the Set Button  
F
DTS Neo:6 MUSIC  
lights, release the button. You may then select  
from the desired option. (See pages 46-54 for  
more information on configuring the remote.)  
N
DTS Digital Mode Selector: When a DTS  
source is in use the AVR will select the appropri-  
ate mode automatically and no other mode will  
be available. Pressing this button will display the  
mode currently selected by the AVR´s decoder,  
depending on the surround material played and  
DTS Neo:6  
MOVIES  
b
Speaker Select: Press this button to begin  
U
Macro Buttons: Press these buttons to  
the process of configuring the AVR’s Bass  
Management System for use with the type of  
speakers used in your system. Once the button  
⁄ ¤  
store or recall a “Macro, which is a pre-pro-  
grammed sequence of commands stored in the  
remote. (See page 49 for more information on  
storing and recalling macros.)  
the speaker setting (see item  
6, page 5). When  
a DTS source is not in use, this button has no  
function. (See page 23, 33 for the available DTS  
options.)  
has been pressed, use the  
/
buttons  
E
to  
select the channel you wish to set up. Press the  
Set Button and then select the speaker  
F
V
RDS Select Button: Press this button to  
type (Large, Small or None) appropriate with the  
speaker in use. (See page 27 for more informa-  
tion.)  
O
Logic 7 Selector: Press this button to  
display the various messages that are part of the  
RDS data system of the AVR’s tuner. (See page 45  
for more information on RDS).  
select one of the available Logic 7 surround  
modes. (See page 33 for the available Logic 7  
options.)  
c
Multi-Room: Press this button to activate  
W
Preset Up/Down: When the tuner is in  
the Multiroom system or to begin the process of  
changing the input or volume level for the sec-  
ond zone. (See page 42 for more information on  
the Multiroom system.)  
P
Transport Control Buttons: These but-  
use, press these buttons to scroll through the  
stations programmed into the AVR’s memory.  
When CD or DVD is selected using the Input  
Selector button  
tion as Slow Fwd/Rev (DVD) or ”+10” (CD,  
CDR).  
tons do not have any functions for the AVR, but  
they may be programmed for the forward/reverse  
play operation of a wide variety of CD or DVD  
players, and audio or video- cassette recorders.  
(See page 46 for more information on program-  
ming the remote.)  
4, these buttons may func-  
d
Volume Up/Down: Press these buttons to  
raise or lower the system volume.  
X
Clear Button: Press this button to clear  
Q
Light Button: Press this button to activate  
incorrect entries when using the remote to directly  
enter a radio station’s frequency.  
the remote’s built-in backlight for better legibility  
of the buttons in a darkened room.  
Y
Memory Button: Press this button to enter  
R
Skip Up/Down Buttons: These buttons do  
a radio station into the AVR’s preset memory. Two  
underline indicators will flash at the right side of  
the Main Information Display  
have five seconds to enter a preset memory  
location using the Numeric Keys  
not have a direct function with the AVR, but  
when used with a compatibly programmed CD or  
DVD player/changer they will change the tracks  
on the disc currently being played.  
˜, you then  
H. (See  
page 44 for more information.)  
12 MAIN REMOTE CONTROL FUNCTIONS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Main Remote Control Functions  
e
VDI Button: This button does not have any  
Tone Control Button: This button controls  
function for the AVR, but is provided for your use  
in programming the codes that are used to scroll  
up or down through the available inputs on your  
video display. This allows you to switch video  
inputs that are directly connected to your video  
display. Alternatively, you may program any com-  
patible remote code into the “up” and “down”  
portions of this button. For information on  
“learning” remote codes into a button on the  
AVR remote, follow the instructions shown  
on page 48.  
the tone mode settings, enabling adjustment of  
the bass and treble boost/cut. You may also use  
it to take the tone controls out of the signal path  
completely for “flat” response. The first press of  
the button displays a TONEINmessage in  
the Lower Display Line  
˜
and in the on-  
screen display. To take the controls out of the  
¤
/
signal path press either of the  
Navigation  
Buttons until the display reads TONE  
E
OUT. To change the bass or treble settings,  
press the button again until the desired option  
appears in the Lower Display Line  
˜
and in  
f
Channel Up/Down Selector: This button  
the on-screen display and then press either of  
has no function when the AVR is being con-  
trolled, but when programmed for use with a  
VCR, TV, cable box, satellite receiver or other  
similar product it will change the channel up or  
down. See pages 46-54 for more information on  
programming the remote.  
¤
/
the  
Navigation Buttons  
E
to enter the  
desired boost or cut setting. See page 22 for  
more information on the tone controls.  
NOTE: With the press of any remote button the  
Input Selector button 45associated  
with the botton pressed will briefly flash red to  
confirm the transmission of the command, as  
long as there is a function for that button with  
the device selected.  
g
Mute: Press this button to momentarily  
silence the AVR or TV set being controlled,  
depending on which device has been selected.  
When the AVR remote is being programmed to  
operate another device, this button is pressed with  
the Input Selector button  
4
to begin the  
programming process. (See page 46 for more  
information on programming the remote.)  
MAIN REMOTE CONTROL FUNCTIONS 13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Zone II Remote Control Functions  
The Zone II remote may be used in either the  
©
Preset Up/Down – Track Skip: When the  
same room where the AVR is located, or it may  
be used in a separate room with an optional  
infrared sensor that is connected to the AVR’s  
AVR’s tuner is selected as the input source, these  
buttons will move up or down through the list of  
stations that have been stored in the preset  
memory. When a CD or DVD player is selected,  
these buttons activate the forward or reverse  
track or chapter skip functions.  
POWER  
OFF  
MUTE  
VID2  
A
B
K
AVR  
VID1  
Multi IR input jack  
O.  
AM/FM  
DVD  
VID3  
CD  
VID4  
TAPE  
UP  
C
D
å
Power Off: When used in the room where  
˙
Disc Skip: Press this button to change  
the AVR is located, press this button to place the  
unit in Standby. When it is used in a remote  
room with a sensor that is connected to the  
discs on compatible Harman Kardon CD or DVD  
changers.  
DN  
TUNING  
E
F
G
DN  
UP  
Multi IR jack  
O, this button turns the Multi-  
PRESET  
î
Volume Up/Down: When used in the  
Room system off.  
room where the AVR is located, press this button  
to raise or lower the volume in that room. When  
it is used in a remote room with a sensor that is  
H
DISC SKIP  
DISC SKIP  
AVR Selector: Press this button to turn on  
J
the AVR. The input in use when the unit was last  
on will be selected.  
connected to the Multi IR Jack  
O, this button  
will raise or lower the volume in the remote  
room.  
I
ç
AM/FM Tuner Select: Press this button to  
VOLUME  
select the Tuner as the input to the Multiroom  
system. Press it again to change between the  
AM and FM bands.  
Play Forward/Reverse/Stop: Press these  
buttons to control compatible Harman Kardon  
CD, DVD or cassette players.  
Input Selectors: When the AVR is off,  
K Mute: When used in the room where the  
AVR is located, press this button to temporarily  
silence the unit. When it is used in a remote  
room with a sensor that is connected to the  
Multi IR Jack O, this button will temporarily  
silence the feed to the remote room only. Press  
the button again to return to the previous vol-  
ume level.  
press one of these buttons to turn the unit on  
and to select a specific input. When the unit is  
already in use, pressing one of these buttons will  
change the input.  
Tuning Up/Down – Fast Play: These but-  
tons may be used to change the frequency of  
the tuner. These buttons may also control the  
Fast Play or Fast Reverse functions of compatible  
Harman Kardon CD, DVD or cassette decks in  
the same room, or from a remote room when an  
IR link is connected to the AVR.  
Important Note: No matter in which room the  
Zone II remote is used, as with the main remote  
it is important to remember to press the Input  
Selector button  
that corresponds to the  
unit you wish to operate befor you change the  
device to be controlled.  
ƒ
Record/Pause: Press this button to acti-  
vate the Record or Pause function on compatible  
Harman Kardon CD, DVD or Cassette Deck  
products.  
NOTE: The Zone II remote may be used in either  
the same room where the AVR is located, or it  
may be used in a separate room with an option-  
al infrared sensor that is connected to the AVR’s  
Multi IR input jack f. When it is used in the  
same room as the AVR, it will control the func-  
tions of the AVR or any compatible Harman  
Kardon products in that room. When it is used in  
a separate room via a sensor connected to the  
Multi IR Jack f, the buttons for power, input  
source, volume and mute will control the source  
and volume for the second zone, as connected  
to the Multi Out Jacks . (See page 42 for  
complete information on using the Multiroom  
system.)  
å
ç
ƒ
©
˙
î
Power Off  
AVR Selector  
AM/FM Tuner Select  
Input Selectors  
Tuning Up/Down – Fast Play  
Record/Pause  
Preset/Track Skip  
Disc Skip  
Volume Up/Down  
Play Forward/Reverse/Stop  
K Mute  
14 ZONE II REMOTE CONTROL FUNCTIONS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installation and Connections  
After unpacking the unit, and placing it on a solid  
surface capable of supporting its weight, you will  
need to make the connections to your audio and  
video equipment.  
7. Connect the front, center and surround  
speaker outputs DEFcto the respective  
speakers.  
goes to a power amplifier, which will be connect-  
ed to one or more subwoofer speakers. If you are  
using a powered subwoofer that does not have  
line-level input connections, follow the instruc-  
tions furnished with the speaker for connection  
information.  
To assure that all the audio signals are carried to  
your speakers without loss of clarity or resoluti-  
on, we suggest that you use high-quality speaker  
cable. Many brands of cable are available and  
the choice of cable may be influenced by the dis-  
tance between your speakers and the receiver,  
the type of speakers you use, personal prefer-  
ences and other factors. Your dealer or installer is  
a valuable resource to consult in selecting the  
proper cable.  
Audio Equipment Connections  
We recommend that you use high-quality inter-  
connect cables when making connections to  
source equipment and recorders to preserve the  
integrity of the signals.  
9. If an external multi-channel audio source with  
5.1 or 7.1 outputs such as an external digital  
processor/decoder, DVD-Audio or SACD player is  
used, connect the outputs of that device to the  
8-Channel Direct Inputs  
9.  
When making connections to audio source  
equipment or speakers it is always a good  
practice to unplug the unit from the AC wall  
outlet. This prevents any possibility of  
accidentally sending audio or transient signals to  
the speakers that may damage them.  
Video Equipment Connections  
Regardless of the brand of cable selected, we  
recommend that you use a cable constructed of  
fine, multistrand copper with an area greater than  
2 mm2.  
Video equipment is connected in the same manner  
as audio components. Again, the use of high-  
quality interconnect cables is recommended to  
preserve signal quality.  
1. Connect the analog output of a CD player to  
Cable with an area of 1.5 mm2 may be used for  
short runs of less than 4 m. We do not recom-  
mend that you use cables with an area less than  
1mm2 due to the power loss and degradation in  
performance that will occur.  
the CD inputs  
6.  
1. Connect a VCR’s audio and video Play/Out  
jacks to the Video 1 or Video 2 In jacks QT  
XZon the rear panel. The Audio and Video  
Record/In jacks on the VCR should be connected  
to the Video 1 or Video 2 Out jacks PR  
Wa on the AVR.  
NOTE: When the CD player has both fixed and  
variable audio outputs it is best to use the fixed  
output unless you find that the input to the  
receiver is so low that the sound is noisy, or so  
high that the signal is distorted.  
Cables that are run inside walls should have the  
appropriate markings to indicate listing with any  
appropriate testing agency standards. Questions  
about running cables inside walls should be  
referred to your installer or a licensed electrician  
who is familiar with the applicable local building  
codes in your area.  
2. Connect the analog Play/Out jacks of a cas-  
sette deck, MD, CD-R or other audio recorder to  
2. Connect the analog audio and video outputs  
of a satellite receiver, cable TV converter or televi-  
sion set or any other video source to the Video  
the Tape Input jacks  
Record/In jacks on the recorder to the Tape  
Output jacks on the AVR.  
2. Connect the analog  
3
SY jacks.  
3
3. Connect the analog audio and video outputs  
of a DVD or laser disc player to the DVD jacks  
3. Connect the digital output of any digital  
sources such as a CD or DVD changer or player,  
advanced video game, a digital satellite receiver,  
HDTV tuner or digital cable set-top box or the  
output of a compatible computer sound card to  
the Optical and Coaxial Digital Inputs  
When connecting wires to the speakers, be cer-  
tain to observe proper polarity. Note that the  
positive (+) terminal of each speaker connection  
now carries a specific color code as noted on  
page 7. However, most speakers will still use a  
red terminal for the postive (+) connection. Con-  
nect the “negative” or “black” wire to the same  
terminal on both the receiver and the speaker.  
5C  
.
4. Connect the digital audio outputs of a CD, MD  
or DVD player, satellite receiver, cable box or  
HDTV converter to the appropriate Optical or  
UV*Ó  
4. Connect the Coaxial or Optical Digital  
Outputs on the rear panel of the AVR to the  
.
Coaxial Digital Inputs UV*Ó  
.
NOTE: When connecting a device such as a digi-  
tal cable box or other set-top tuner product with  
a digital audio output, we recommend that you  
connect both the digital and analog outputs of  
the product to your AVR. The audio input polling  
feature of the AVR will then be able to make cer-  
tain that you have a constant audio feed, since it  
will automatically switch the audio input to the  
analog jacks if the digital feed is interrupted or  
not available for a particular channel.  
A
NOTE: While most speaker manufacturers  
matching digital input connections on a CD-R or  
MiniDisc recorder.  
adhere to an industry convention of using black  
terminals for negative and red ones for positive,  
some manufacturers may vary from this configu-  
ration. To assure proper phase and optimal per-  
formance, consult the identification plate on your  
speaker or the speaker’s manual to verify polarity.  
If you do not know the polarity of your speaker,  
ask your dealer for advice before proceeding, or  
consult the speaker’s manufacturer.  
5. Assemble the AM Loop Antenna supplied with  
the unit as shown below. Connect it to the AM  
and GND screw terminals  
0.  
If your system requires direct connection of a  
video source to your display, we suggest that you  
We also recommend that the length of cable  
used to connect speaker pairs be identical. For  
example, use the same length piece of cable to  
connect the front-left and front-right or sur-  
round-left and surround-right speakers, even if  
the speakers are a different distance from the  
AVR.  
consider programming the VDI Buttons  
e
so  
that you may change the input used by your dis-  
play from the AVR’s remote. For information on  
“learning” remote codes into a button on the  
AVR remote, follow the instructions shown on  
page 48.  
6. Connect the supplied FM antenna to the FM  
(75 ohm) connection . The FM antenna may  
1
be an external roof antenna, an inside powered  
or wire lead antenna or a connection from a  
cable system. Note that if the antenna or connec-  
tion uses 300-ohm twin-lead cable, you should  
use a 300-ohm-to-75-ohm adapter to make the  
connection.  
5. Connect the Composite and S-Video (if  
8. Connections to a subwoofer are normally  
made via a line level audio connection from the  
S-Video device is in use) Monitor Output  
B
jacks on the receiver to the composite and  
S-Video input of your television monitor or video  
projector.  
Subwoofer Output  
4
to the line-level input  
of a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier. When a  
passive subwoofer is used, the connection first  
INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS 15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installation and Connections  
6. If your DVD Player has Y/Pr/Pb analog compo-  
nent video outputs, connect them to the  
Important Note for Adapter Cables:  
SCART A/V Connections  
If the cinch connectors of the adapter you’ll use  
are labeled, connect the Audio and Video ”In”  
plugs with the corresponding Audio and Video  
”In” jacks on the AVR (and with a VCR connect  
the ”Out” plugs to the ”Out” jacks on the AVR).  
Note that with some adapter types it may be  
just turned around: If no signal is audible/ visible  
when the VCR is playing connect the “Out”  
plugs to the ”In” jacks on the AVR and turned  
around. If the adapter plugs are not labeled in  
that way, pay attention to the signal flow direc-  
tions as shown in the diagrams above and in the  
instruction attached to the adapter. If uncertain,  
don’t hesitate to consult your dealer.  
For the connections described above your video  
device needs RCA (cinch) connectors or/and S-  
Video connectors for all Audio and Video signals:  
Any normal video device (Not SVHS or High 8)  
for only playback needs 3 RCA jacks, VCRs for  
record and playback even 6 RCA jacks. Any  
S-Video device (SVHS, High 8) needs 2 RCA  
(Audio) and 1 S-Video jack (Video), if it´s a  
playback unit, or 4 RCA (Audio In/Out) and  
2 S-Video (Video In/Out) jacks, if it´s a recording  
VCR.  
Component DVD Inputs  
f. Although this set  
of inputs may be assigned to any of the four  
video inputs on the AVR 635, the factory default  
is for this input to be assigned to the DVD  
Audio Inputs  
5
Remember to make a digital  
audio connection between the DVD player and  
the AVR, with the Coaxial Digital Input 1  
being the factory default. For information on  
changing the input assignments for either the  
component video jacks or the DVD player’s audio  
connection, see page 20.  
V
Many european video devices are equipped with  
RCA (Cinch) or S-Video jacks only partially, not  
for all audio and video in/outputs needed as  
described above, but with a so called Scart or  
Euro-AV connector (almost rectangular jack with  
21 pins, see drawings on next page).  
7. If you have other devices with Y/Pr/Pb or RGB  
component video outputs, connect the source  
device to the Component Video 1 and 2  
Inputs LN. The audio connections may be to  
any of the Video Audio Inputs QSTÔor  
the Optical or Coaxial Digital Inputs UV  
. When using either of the Component  
Video Inputs, make certain that the audio and  
video inputs are properly configured in the  
IN/OUTSETUPmenu, as described on  
page 20.  
Important Notes for S-Video connections:  
1. Only the S-Video In/Out of S-Video devices  
must be connected to the AVR, NOT both,  
normal video and S-Video In/Outputs (except the  
TV, see item below).  
In that case the following Scart to Cinch  
adapters or cables are needed:  
When both connections are made, only the  
S-Video signal will be viewed on the screen.  
• Units for playback, such as satellite receivers,  
camcorders, DVD or LD players, need an  
adapter from Scart to 3 RCA plugs, see fig. 1  
(normal video devices) or from Scart to 2  
RCA+1 S-Video plugs, see fig. 4 (S-Video  
devices).  
2. Like most common AV units the AVR does not  
convert the Video signal to S-Video, only vice  
versa. Thus both connections must be made from  
the AVR to the TV if both, Video and S-Video  
sources, are used, and the appropriate input on  
the TV must be selected.  
8. If the component video inputs are used,  
connect the Component Video Output  
K
to  
the component video inputs of your TV, projector  
or display device.  
• HiFi VCRs need an adapter from Scart to 6  
RCA plugs, see fig. 2 (normal video), or from  
Scart to 4 Audio+2S-Video jacks, see fig. 5  
(S-Video VCR). Read carefully the instruction  
attached to the adapter to find which of the  
six plugs is used for the record signal to the  
VCR (connect with the AVR´s Out jacks) and  
for the playback signal from the VCR (connect  
with the AVR´s In jacks). Do not misconnect  
Audio and Video signals. Don´t hesitate to  
consult your dealer, if you are uncertain.  
9. If you have a camcorder, video game or other  
audio/video device that is connected to the AVR  
on a temporary, rather than permanent basis,  
connect the audio, video and digital audio out-  
puts of that device to the Front Panel Inputs  
*ÓÔ. A device connected to the Video 4  
jacks  
Ô
is selected as the Video 4 input, and  
connected to the digital jacks *Óit is selected  
as "Optical 4" or "Coaxial 4" input. (See page  
20 for more information on input configuration.)  
• If you use only normal video devices the TV  
monitor needs an adapter from 3 RCA plugs  
to Scart (fig. 3) only. If also S-Video devices are  
used an adapter from 2 RCA+1S-Video plugs  
to Scart is needed additionally (fig. 6),  
connected to the SCART input on your TV that  
is provided for S-Video.  
Video Connection Notes:  
• Y/Pr/Pb Component, RGB (see page 17), or  
Composite video signals may only be viewed in  
their native formats and will not be converted  
to the other formats. S-Video signals will be  
converted to composite signal. The OSD can be  
viewed on the TV screen in any case, with Video  
or S-Video input selected on the TV.  
Note that only the video plugs (the "yellow"  
cinch plug in fig. 3 and the S-Video plug in  
fig. 6) must be connected to the TV Monitor  
• When the component video jacks are used, the  
on-screen menus will not be visible. You must  
switch to the standard composite or S-Video  
input on your TV to view those menus.  
Output  
B, and the volume on the TV must be  
reduced to minimum.  
• All component inputs/outputs can be used for  
RGB signals too, in the same way as described  
for the Y/Pr/Pb signals, then connected to the  
jacks with the corresponding color. But this is  
only correct as long as only the three RGB  
video signals are output by the video source,  
with a sync signal in the "G" signal only, with-  
out any sync signal output separately by the  
source.  
16 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installation and Connections  
Important Note for the Use of  
SCART-Cinch Adapters:  
Black  
Figure 1:  
SCART/Cinch-Adapter for  
playback;  
Yellow  
When video sources are connected to the TV  
directly with a SCART cable, specific control  
signals apart from Audio/Video signals will be  
fed to the TV. These specific signals are: With all  
video sources, the signal for automatic input  
selection that switches the TV automatically to  
the appropriate input as soon as the video  
source is started. And with DVD players, the  
signals automatically turning the TV to 4:3/16:9  
format (with 16:9 TVs or with 4:3 TVs with  
selectable 16:9 format) and turning the RGB  
video decoder of the TV on or off, depending on  
the DVD player´s setting. With any adapter cable,  
these control signals will be lost and the  
appropriate setting of the TV must be made  
manually.  
Red  
signal flow:  
SCART ¡ Cinch  
Black  
Red  
1  
Blue  
Yellow  
Figure 2:  
SCART/Cinch-Adapter for  
record and playback;  
signal flow:  
1
Green  
White  
SCART Cinch  
Black  
Figure 3:  
Cinch/SCART-Adapter for  
playback;  
Yellow  
Red  
Note for RGB signal with SCART:  
signal flow:  
If you use a unit providing RGB signals on a  
SCART output (as e.g. most DVD players do) and  
you want to use that RGB signal, this SCART  
output must be connected directly to your TV.  
Although the AVR can switch three-way video  
signals (like component signals Y/Pb/Pr), most  
TVs need separate sync signals for RGB (also  
with SCART) that cannot be switched and pro-  
vided by the AVR.  
Cinch ¡ SCART  
Red  
Figure 4:  
SCART/S-Video Adapter  
for playback;  
Black  
S-Video In  
signal flow:  
SCART ¡ Cinch  
Black  
Red  
RGB signals can be pathed through the AVR only  
when no separate sync signal is needed (see last  
”Video Connection Note” on page 16).  
1  
Blue  
Yellow  
Figure 5:  
SCART/S-Video Adapter  
for record and playback;  
signal flow:  
S-Video In  
S-Video Out  
SCART Cinch  
Red  
Figure 6:  
SCART/S-Video Adapter  
for playback;  
Black  
S-Video Out  
signal flow:  
Cinch ¡ SCART  
1 Also other colours possible, e.g. brown and grey.  
INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS 17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installation and Connections  
Multiroom Audio Connections  
a standard RJ-45 jack in compliance with the  
instructions furnished with the A-BUS module.  
System and Power Connections  
The AVR 635 is designed for flexible use with  
multiroom systems, external control components  
and power amplifiers.  
Depending on your system`s requirement and  
distance from the AVR to the remote room, three  
options are available for audio connection:  
No further installation or adjustment is needed,  
as the A-BUS connector on the AVR routes the  
signals in and out of the keypad to their proper  
destination for power, signal source and control.  
The output fed to the A-BUS jack is determined  
by the AVR’s multiroom system, and the menus  
may be used as is.  
Option 1: Use high-quality, shielded audio  
interconnect phono cable from the AVR’s loca-  
tion to the remote room. In the remote room,  
connect the interconnect cable to a stereo  
power amplifier. The amplifier will be connected  
to the room’s speakers. At the AVR, plug the  
audio interconnect cables into the Multiroom  
Main Room Remote Control Extension  
If the receiver is placed behind a solid or smoked  
glass cabinet door, the obstruction may prevent  
the remote sensor from receiving commands. In  
this event, the remote sensor of any Harman  
Kardon or other compatible device, not covered  
by the door, or an optional remote sensor may  
be used. Connect the Remote IR Output of  
that device or the output of the remote sensor to  
RS-232 Connections  
The AVR is equipped with an RS-232 Serial  
Output Jacks  
7
on the AVR’s rear panel.  
Connection Port  
d
that may be used for two  
purposes. When the port is connected to a com-  
patible, optional, external computer, keypad or  
control system the AVR is capable of bi-direc-  
tional communications that enable the external  
system to control the AVR, and for the AVR to  
report status and handshake data back to the  
controller. Use of the RS-232 port for this type of  
control requires specific technical knowledge,  
and we recommend that any connection and  
programming for control be made by a trained  
installer or technician familiar with the equip-  
ment being used. The RS-232 port may also be  
used as an access point through which the AVR’s  
operating system and surround mode memories  
may be updated via connection to a compatible  
computer. At the time that any upgrade is avail-  
able, instructions for making the connection and  
installing the upgrade will be available through  
the Product Support area of the Harman Kardon  
Option 2: Place the amplifier that will provide  
power to the remote location speakers in the  
same room as the AVR, and connect the  
the Remote IR Input jack  
N.  
If other components are also prevented from  
receiving remote commands, only one sensor is  
needed. Simply use this unit’s sensor or a remote  
eye by running a connection from the Remote  
Multiroom Output jacks  
7
on the rear panel  
of the AVR to the audio input of the remote  
room amplifier. Use the appropriate speaker wire  
to connect the optional power amplifier to the  
remote speakers. High-quality wire of at least  
2.5 mm2 is recommended for long multiroom  
connections.  
IR Output jack  
M
to the Remote IR Input  
jack on Harman Kardon or other compatible  
equipment.  
Multiroom IR Link  
Option 3: Taking advantage of the AVR’s built-  
in seven-channel amplifier, it is possible to use  
two of the amplifier channels to power speakers  
in the remote room. When using this option you  
will not be able to use the full 7.1-channel  
capabilities of the AVR in the main listening  
room, but you will be able to add another  
listening room without additional external  
power amplifiers. To use the internal amplifiers  
to power a remote zone, connect the speakers  
for the remote room location to the Surround  
The key to remote room operation is to link the  
remote room to the AVR’s location with wire for  
an infrared receiver and speakers or an amplifier.  
The remote room IR receiver (this can be an  
optional IR receiver or any other remotable  
Harman Kardon device in the remote room with  
IR sensor integrated) should be connected to the  
AVR via standard coaxial cable. Connect the  
Remote IR Output of the device or of the  
optional sensor with the Multiroom IR Input  
The physical connection to the AVR’s RS-232  
port is a standard D-9 connection but to assure  
compatible and proper operation, specific soft-  
ware commands and pin wiring schemes may be  
required.  
jack  
O
on the AVR’s rear panel.  
Back/Multiroom Speaker Outputs  
c.  
If other Harman Kardon compatible source  
equipment is part of the main room installation,  
Before using the remote room you will need to  
configure the amplifiers for surround operation  
by changing a setting in the Multiroom menu,  
following the instructions shown on page 42.  
the Remote IR Output jack  
M
on the rear  
AC Power Connections  
panel should be connected to the IR IN jack on  
that source device. This will enable the remote  
room location to control source equipment  
functions.  
This unit is equipped with two accessory AC  
outlets. They may be used to power accessory  
devices, but they should not be used with  
high-current draw equipment such as power  
amplifiers. The total power draw to the  
NOTE: For all options, you may connect an  
optional IR sensor (Harman Kardon He 1000) in  
the remote room to the AVR via an appropriate  
cable. Connect the sensor’s cable to the  
When a remote IR sensor is used to control non-  
Harman Kardon source equipment, we recom-  
mend that you make a direct connection or use  
an optional, external IR “blaster” connected to  
Multiroom IR Input  
O
on the AVR and use  
Unswitched Outlet  
H
must not exceed  
the Zone II remote to control the room volume.  
Alternatively, you may install an optional volume  
control between the output of the amplifiers and  
the speakers.  
100 watts, that to the Switched Outlet  
G
50 watts.  
the Remote IR Carrier Output Jack  
g. If you  
The Switched  
G
outlet will receive power only  
are in doubt as to which IR Output jack to use  
for the equipment in your system, contact your  
dealer or installer, or the manufacturer’s support  
site and ask whether the unit to be controlled  
uses “full carrier” or “stripped” carrier IR com-  
mands. When “full carrier commands” are used,  
make the connection to the Remote IR Carrier  
when the unit is on completely. This is recom-  
mended for devices that have no power switch  
or a mechanical power switch that may be left in  
the “ON” position.  
A-BUS Installation Connections  
The AVR is among the very few receivers  
available today that offers built-in A-BUS Ready®  
operation. When used with an optional A-BUS  
keypad or control module, you have all the  
benefits of remote zone operation without the  
need for an external power amplifier.  
NOTE: Many audio and video products go into a  
Standby mode when they are used with  
switched outlets, and cannot be fully turned on  
using the outlet alone without a remote control  
command.  
Output Jack  
g. Otherwise, make the connec-  
tion to the Remote IR Output Jack  
M
as  
noted above.  
To use the AVR with an approved A-BUS  
product, simply connect the keypad or module  
that is in the remote room to the AVR using  
standard “Category 5” wiring that is properly  
rated for the inwall use specific to the installa-  
tion. Terminate the wiring at the receiver end to  
NOTE: All remotely controlled components must  
be linked together in a “daisy chain. Connect  
the IR OUT jack of one unit to the IR IN of the  
next to establish this chain.  
The Unswitched  
as long as the unit is plugged into a powered AC  
outlet and the Main Power Switch is on.  
H
outlet will receive power  
1
18 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installation and Connections  
Center Front Speaker  
The AVR features a removable power cord that  
allows wires to be run to a complex installation  
so that the unit, itself, need not be installed until  
it is ready for connection. When all connections  
described above have been made, connect the  
AC Power cord to the AC Power Cord Jack  
Depending on the specifics of your room  
acoustics and the type of speakers in use, you  
may find that imaging is improved by moving the  
front-left and front-right speakers slightly for-  
ward of the center-channel speaker. If possible,  
adjust all front loudspeakers so that they are  
aimed at ear height when you are seated in the  
listening position.  
No more than  
60cm  
I
.
Left Front  
Speaker  
Right Front  
Speaker  
The AVR draws significantly more current than  
other household devices such as computers that  
use removable power cords. For that reason, it is  
important that only the cord supplied with the  
unit (or a direct replacement of identical capa-  
city) be used.  
Using these guidelines, you’ll find that it takes  
some experimentation to find the correct loca-  
tion for the front speakers in your particular  
installation. Don’t be afraid to move things  
around until the system sounds correct. Optimize  
your speakers so that audio transitions across  
the front of the room sound smooth.  
A) Front Channel Speaker Installation with  
Direct-View TV Sets or Rear-Screen Projectors  
TV or Projection Screen  
Once the power cord is connected, you are  
almost ready to enjoy the AVR’s incredible power  
and fidelity!  
Center Front  
Speaker  
Left Front  
Speaker  
Right Front  
Speaker  
When the AVR is used in 5.1-channel operation,  
the preferred location for surround speakers is  
on the side walls of the room, at or slightly  
behind the listening position. In a 7.1-channel  
system, both side surround and back surround  
speakers are required. The center of the speaker  
should face you (see below).  
Speaker Selection  
No matter which type or brand of speakers is  
used, the same model or brand of speaker  
should be used for the front-left, center and  
front-right speakers. This creates a seamless  
front soundstage and eliminates the possibility  
of distracting sonic disturbances that occur when  
a sound moves across mismatched front-channel  
speakers.  
Rear surround speakers are required when a full  
7.1-channel system is installed, and they may  
also be used in 5.1 channel mode as an alterna-  
tive mounting position when it is not practical to  
place the main surround speakers at the sides of  
the room. Speakers may be placed on a rear  
wall, behind the listening position. As with the  
side speakers, the center of the rear surrounds  
should face you. The speakers should be no more  
than 2 meters behind the rear of the seating  
area.  
Speaker Placement  
The placement of speakers in a multichannel  
home-theater system can have a noticeable  
impact on the quality of sound reproduced.  
Optional Rear-Wall Mounting  
B) The distance between the left and right  
speakers should be equal to the distance from  
the seating position to the viewing screen.  
You may also experiment with placing the left  
and right speakers slightly forward of the center  
speaker.  
Depending on the type of center-channel speak-  
er in use and your viewing device, place the cen-  
ter speaker either directly above or below your  
TV, or in the center behind a perforated front-  
projection screen.  
Subwoofers produce largely nondirectional  
sound, so they may be placed almost anywhere  
in a room. Actual placement should be based on  
room size and shape and the type of subwoofer  
used. One method of finding the optimal loca-  
tion for a subwoofer is to begin by placing it in  
the front of the room, about 15cm from a wall,  
or near the front corner of the room. Another  
method is to temporarily place the subwoofer in  
the spot where you will normally sit, and then  
walk around the room until you find a spot  
where the subwoofer sounds best. Place the  
subwoofer in that spot. You should also follow  
the instructions of the subwoofer’s manufacturer,  
or you may wish to experiment with the best  
location for a subwoofer in your listening room.  
Once the center-channel speaker is installed,  
position the left-front and right-front speakers so  
that they are as far away from one another as  
the center-channel speaker is from the preferred  
listening position. Ideally, the front-channel  
speakers should be placed so that their tweeters  
are no more than 60cm above or below the  
tweeter in the center-channel speaker.  
Rear speaker mounting is an alternate location  
for 5.1 systems. It is required for 7.1 operation.  
They should also be at least 0.5 meter from your  
TV set unless the speakers are magnetically  
shielded to avoid colourings on the TV screen.  
Note that most speakers are not shielded, even  
with complete surround sets only the Center  
speaker may be.  
INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS 19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Configuration  
‹ ›  
/
⁄ ¤  
/
Once the speakers have been placed in the room  
and connected, the remaining steps are to pro-  
gram the system configuration memories.  
find them easier to make via the unit’s on-screen  
display system. These easy-to-read displays give  
you a clear picture of the current status of the unit  
and facilitate speaker, delay, input or digital selec-  
tion you are making.  
the Selector buttons  
7$or  
E
on the front panel or remote.  
**  
MASTER  
MENU  
**  
Although it is necessary to assign input/output  
settings and surround mode choices manually, we  
recommend that you take advantage of the power To view the on-screen displays, make certain you  
and precision of EzSet/EQ to automatically select  
and enter the settings for all other audio parame-  
ters. This will not only save you time; it will ensure  
that your room is calibrated and equalized with an  
accuracy not possible when these settings are  
made manually. You are now ready to power up  
the AVR 635 to begin these final adjustments.  
IN/OUT  
AUDIO  
SETUP  
SETUP  
SURROUND  
EZSET/EQ  
SELECT  
have made a connection from the Video  
MANUAL  
SETUP  
MULTI-ROOM  
ADVANCED  
Monitor Out jack on the rear panel to the  
B
composite or S-Video input of your TV or projector.  
In order to view the AVR’s displays, the correct  
video input must be selected on your video dis-  
play. Note that the on-screen menus are not avail-  
able when a component video display is in use.  
Figure 1  
System Setup  
IMPORTANT NOTE: When viewing the on-screen  
menus using a CRT-based projector, plasma display  
or any direct-view CRT monitor or television, it is  
important that they not be left on the screen for an  
extended period of time. As with any video display,  
but particularly with projectors, constant display of a  
static image such as these menus or video game  
images may cause the image to be permanently  
“burned into” the CRT. This type of damage is not  
covered by the AVR warranty and may not be cov-  
ered by the projector TV set’s warranty.  
First Turn On  
You are now ready to power up the AVR to begin  
these final adjustments.  
The AVR 635 features an advanced memory sys-  
tem that enables you to establish different confi-  
gurations for speaker ”size, component video  
assignment, digital input, surround mode and  
crossover frequency for each input source. To ease  
the speaker setting, the same speaker setting can  
also be made for all inputs. This flexibility enables  
you to custom tailor the way in which you listen to  
each source and have the AVR memorize them.  
This means, for example, that you may associate  
different surround modes and analog or digital  
inputs with different sources, or set different  
speaker configurations with the resultant changes  
to the bass management system or the use of the  
center speaker and/or the Subwoofer. Once these  
settings are made, they will automatically be  
recalled whenever you select that input.  
1. Make certain that the AC power cord is firmly  
inserted in to the AC Power cord Recepticle  
I
and plug the cord into an unswitched AC  
outlet. To maintian the unit's safety rating,  
DO NOT substitute the power cord for one with  
lower current capacity.  
2. Press the Main Power Switch  
latches and the word “OFF” on the top of the  
switch disappears inside the front panel. Note  
that the Power Indicator  
orange, indicating that the unit is in the  
Standby mode.  
1
in until it  
The AVR has two on-screen display modes, “Semi-  
OSD” and “Full-OSD.” When making configuration  
adjustments, it is recommended that the Full-OSD  
mode be used. This will place a complete status  
report or option listing on the screen, making it  
easier to view the available options and make the  
settings on the screen. The Semi-OSD mode uses  
one-line displays only.  
3
will turn  
3. Remove the protective plastic film from the  
main front-panel lens. If left in place, the film  
may affect the performance of your remote  
control.  
The factory default settings for the AVR have all  
inputs configured for an analog audio input  
except for the DVD and Video 3 input, where the  
Note that when the full OSD system is in use, the  
menu selections are not shown in the Informa-  
Coaxial Digital Input  
V
and Optical Digital  
tion Display  
tem is used, OSD ON will appear in the Upper  
Display Line  
˜. When the full OSD menu sys-  
4. Install the four supplied AAA batteries in the  
remote as shown. Be certain to follow the (+)  
and (–) polarity indicators that are on the top of  
the battery compartment.  
Input 1 are the default. Once the DSP pro-  
U
cessing system is used for the first time for any  
input, the speaker settings will automatically  
default to “Small” at all positions with the sub-  
woofer set to “LFE.” The default setting for the  
surround modes is “Surround Off,” or two-channel  
stereo, although Dolby Digital or DTS will auto-  
matically be selected as appropriate when a  
source with digital encoding is in use.  
˜
.
When the semi-OSD system is used in conjunction  
with the discrete configuration buttons, the on  
screen display will show a single line of text with the  
current menu selection. That selection will also be  
shown in the Upper or Lower Display Line  
The full OSD system can always be turned on or  
off by pressing the OSD button . When this  
button is pressed the MASTERMENU  
˜.  
L
Before using the unit, you will probably want to  
change the settings for most inputs so that they  
are properly configured to reflect the use of digital  
or analog inputs and the surround mode associat-  
ed with the input. Remember that since the AVR  
memorizes the settings for each input individually,  
you will need to make these adjustments for each  
input used. However, once they are made, further  
adjustment is only required when system compo-  
nents are changed.  
(Figure 1) will appear, and adjustments are made  
from the individual menus. Note that the menus  
will remain on the screen for 20 seconds after the  
latest action was made on the screen menu, then  
they will “time-out” and disappear from the screen.  
The time-out may be increased to as much as  
50 seconds by going to the ADVANCED  
SELECTmenu, and changing the item titled  
FULLOSDTIMEOUT.  
5. Turn the AVR on either by pressing the System  
Power Control  
Selector on the front panel, or via the  
remote by pressing the Power On Button  
AVR Selector or any of the Input  
Selectors 46on the remote. The Power  
Indicator will turn blue to confirm that the  
unit is on, and the Main Information Display  
will also light up.  
2
or the Input Source  
%
3
,
5
3
To make this process as quick and as easy as pos-  
sible, we suggest that you use the full-OSD system  
with the on-screen menus, and step through each  
input.  
˜
The semi-OSD system is also available as a system  
default, although it may be turned off by using the  
ADVANCEDSELECTmenu. (See page 41).  
With the semi-OSD system, you may make adjust-  
ments directly, by pressing the buttons on the  
front panel or remote control for the specific  
parameter to be adjusted. For example, to change  
the digital input for any of the sources, press the  
NOTE: After pressing one of the Input Selector  
buttons to turn the unit on, press the AVR  
to have the remote control the AVR  
4
Input Setup  
Selector  
5
The first step in configuring the AVR is to select an  
input, i.e. to associate an analog or digital input  
with each input source in use, e.g. CD or DVD.  
Note that once an input is selected, all settings for  
the Digital Input, Speaker Configuration and  
functions.  
Using the On-Screen Display  
When making the following adjustments, you may  
Digital Select Button  
ÛG  
and then any of  
20 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Configuration  
Surround Mode will ”attach” themselves to that  
input and be stored in a non-volatile memory. This Navigation Button  
means that once made, the selection of an input  
will automatically recall those settings. For that  
reason, the procedures described below must be  
repeated for each input source so that you have  
the opportunity to custom tailor each source to  
your specific listening requirements. However,  
once made they need not be changed again  
unless you need to alter a setting.  
blank space as the first character, press the  
this happens by permitting both analog and digi-  
tal connections to the same source on the AVR.  
Digital audio is the default, and the unit will auto-  
matically switch to the analog audio if the digital  
audio stream stops.  
E.  
When the desired character appears, press the  
Navigation Button and repeat the process  
for the next letter, and continue until the desired  
name is entered, up to a maximum of fourteen  
characters.  
E
In cases where only a digital source is used, you  
may wish to disable the Auto Polling feature to  
prevent the AVR from trying to “find” an analog  
source when the digital source is paused. To turn  
Auto Polling off for any input, please refer to the  
explanations on page 42.  
Press the Set Button  
F
to enter the input  
name into the system memory and to proceed  
with the configuration process.  
When using the full-OSD system to make the  
If your system includes any sources that are  
equipped with Y/Pr/Pb component video outputs,  
the AVR is able to switch them to send the proper  
signals to your video display. Each of the three  
Component Video Inputs JLfmay be  
assigned to any source for added system flexibili-  
ty. The default setting is for the Component  
setup adjustments, press the OSD button  
L
An exclusive Harman Kardon feature is the ability  
to switch front panel jacks from their normal use  
as inputs to output connections so that portable  
recording devices may easily be connected. The  
once so that the MASTERMENU(Figure 1)  
appears. Note that the © cursor will be next to  
the IN/OUTSETUPline. Press the Set but-  
ton  
SETUPmenu (Figure 2) will appear on the  
screen. Press the /buttons until the  
F
to enter the menu and the IN/OUT  
front panel analog Video 4 Jacks  
Ô
are nor-  
mally set as an input for use with camcorders,  
video games and other portable audio/video prod-  
ucts, but they may be switched to an output for  
connection to portable audio/video recorders. To  
temporarily switch them to outputs, select the  
E
DVD Jacks  
6/8-Channel Direct Inputs, with the Component  
Video 1 Jacks assigned to the other inputs. If  
f
to be assigned to the DVD and  
desired input name appears in the highlighted  
video, as well as being indicated in the front panel  
L
Input Indicators  
ˆ. If the input will use the  
your system does not include component video at  
standard left/right analog inputs, no further  
adjustment is needed (except with DVD).  
When you are scrolling through the list of avail-  
able inputs, it is possible that you hear a slight  
click from time to time. This is normal, as it is  
caused by the relay that is used to switch  
between the two Component Video Inputs.  
¤
IN/OUTSETUPmenu. Press the button  
this time, or if you do not need to change these  
E
until the on-screen © cursor is pointing to  
¤
defaults, press the Navigation Button  
E
the VIDEO4line. Press the button  
E
so  
to go to the next setting.  
that the word OUTis highlighted. Note that the  
Input/Output Status Indicator between  
the S and Composite video jacks will turn red,  
To change the Component Video assignment, first  
make certain that the © cursor is pointing to the  
COMPONENTINline on the menu screen,  
‹ ›  
(
indicating that the analog Video 4 jacks  
Ô
are  
and then press the  
/
Navigation Button  
E
now record outputs.  
*
IN/OUT  
SETUP  
*
until you see the desired input in the highlighted  
video. The clicking noise that you will hear when  
the component video inputs is switched is normal,  
due to the relay used to ensure proper isolation  
between the three inputs.  
On the AVR, the Coaxial 4 Digital Jack  
Ó
is nor-  
SOURCE  
: VIDEO  
1
mally an input, but it may also be switched to a dig-  
ital output for use with CD-R/RW decks, MD re-  
corders or other digital audio recorders. To change  
⁄ ¤  
TITLE:  
COMPONENT  
IN:COMP  
V
1
DIGITAL  
COAXIAL  
IN :ANALOG  
4
:IN  
OUT  
OUT  
ON  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
V-CONV  
4
:IN  
the jack to an output, press the  
/
buttons  
E
CONV  
PORT  
:OFF  
When the desired component input has been  
while the IN/OUTSETUPmenu is on the  
screen so that the © cursor is next to COAXI-  
:AUTO  
¤
selected, press the Navigation Button  
E
BACK  
TO  
MASTER MENU  
go to the next setting.  
AL4. Then press the /buttons  
word OUTis highlighted. Note that the Digital  
Coax 4 Status Indicator will turn red, indicat-  
E
so that the  
Figure 2  
If you wish to associate one of the digital inputs  
(
¤
with the selected input source, press the  
When one of the four Video inputs is selected as  
the source, you have the option of renaming the  
input as it appears in the on-screen and front  
panel messages. This is helpful if you have more  
than one VCR, if you wish to associate a specific  
product brand name with the input, or to simply  
enter any name that will help you to remember  
which source is being selected.  
ing that the jack is now a record output.  
Button  
E
on the remote while the IN/OUT  
Note: A signal will be sent to this jack only when  
the input selected for use by the AVR is digital.  
Digital signals will be passed through regardless  
of their format, and which digital input (optical or  
coax) they are fed from. However, analog signals  
are not converted to digital, and the format of the  
signal (e.g., PCM, Dolby Digital or DTS) may not  
be changed.  
SETUPmenu (Figure 2) is on the screen, and  
note that the on-screen cursor will drop down to  
‹ ›  
the DIGITALINline. Press the  
/
Buttons  
E
until the name of the desired digital input  
appears. To return to the Analog input, press the  
buttons until the word ANALOGappears.  
To associate an analog or digital input with the  
input source currently selected at any time using  
the discrete function buttons, press the Digital  
¤
/
To change the input name, press the  
Navigation Button on the remote so that  
the © cursor is pointing to TITLE. Next, press  
and hold the Set Button for a few seconds  
until a flashing box appears to the right of the  
E
Selection of the jacks as an output will remain effec-  
tive as long as the AVR is on. However, once the  
unit is turned off, the jack will revert to its normal  
use as an input when the unit is turned on again.  
Input Select Button  
ÛG  
on the front panel  
F
or the remote while the full-OSD is not in use.  
Within five seconds, make your input selection  
using the Selector buttons on the front panel  
⁄ ¤  
colon. Immediately release the Set Button  
as you are now ready to enter the device name.  
F,  
The AVR 635 uses high-quality video decoding cir-  
cuitry that makes it possible to convert standard  
(composite) or S-video signals from their original  
form to separate component analog outputs that  
carry the receiver’s OSD menus and messages  
with no loss in quality. This enables you to simplify  
connections to a digital video display since only  
one set of component video cables is needed to  
view all input sources connected to the AVR 635.  
Conversely, the conversion circuitry may be used  
to convert component inputs to an S-video or  
7$or the  
/
E
Buttons on the remote  
¤
/
Press the  
Navigation Button  
E
and  
until the desired digital or analog input is shown  
in the Main Information Display and in  
the lower third of the video display connected to  
note that a complete set of alpha-numeric charac-  
ters will appear with the start of the alphabet in  
capital letters followed by the lower-case letters  
and then numbers and symbols. When you press  
¤
˜
the AVR. Press the Set Button  
F
to enter the  
new input assignment.  
the Navigation Button  
E, a series of sym-  
Some digital video input sources, such as a cable  
box or HDTV set-top may change between analog  
and digital outputs, depending on which channel  
is in use. The AVR 635’s Auto Polling feature  
allows you to avoid losing the audio feed when  
bols and numbers will appear, followed by a  
reverse list of the alphabet in lower-case letters.  
Press the button either way until the first letter of  
the desired name appears. If you wish to enter a  
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Configuration  
composite video output when a receiver that is  
capable of displaying a component signal is not  
available.  
and Component inputs for the source to be rout-  
ed to the component outputs. To select a specific  
When all desired changes have been made on  
⁄ ¤  
this menu, press the  
/
Navigation Button  
‹ ›  
E
so that the © cursor is next to the  
BACKTOMAINMENUline and press  
the Set Button  
output, press the  
/
Navigation Button  
E
until your desired choice appears in highlighted  
video.  
In most cases you will want to have the conver-  
sion circuitry engaged, but in some installations it  
may be preferable to turn it off. If you prefer the  
way a video signal looks in its original form, you  
may turn the video conversion circuitry off by first  
making certain that the IN/OUTSETUP  
menu (Figure 2) is on the screen, and then press-  
⁄ ¤  
F
.
Surround Setup  
When all needed adjustments have been made,  
The next step for that input is to set the surround  
mode you wish to use with that input. Since sur-  
round modes are a matter of personal taste, feel  
free to select any mode you wish – you may  
change it later. The Surround Mode chart on page  
33 may help you select the mode best suited to  
the input source selected. For example you may  
select Dolby Pro Logic II or Logic 7 for most ana-  
log inputs and Dolby Digital for inputs connected  
to digital sources. In the case of inputs such as a  
CD Player, Tape Deck or Tuner, you may wish to set  
the mode to Stereo, if that is your preferred listen-  
ing mode for standard stereo sources, where it is  
unlikely that surround encoded material will be  
used. Alternatively, the 5 Channel Stereo or Logic 7  
Music mode may also be a good choice for  
stereo-only source material.  
¤
press the Navigation Button  
E
until the  
cursor is next to BACKTOMASTER  
MENUto continue with the system configura-  
tion.  
ing the  
/
Navigation Button  
E
until the  
Audio Setup  
© cursor is pointing to VIDEOCONVand  
This menu allows you to configure the tone con-  
trols and to turn the upsampling on or off. If you  
do not wish to change any of those settings at  
this time, proceed to the next menu screen.  
However, to make configuration changes to those  
parameters, make certain that the MASTER  
MENUis on the screen with the © cursor point-  
ing to the AUDIOSETUPline, and press the  
‹ ›  
/
then press the  
Navigation Button  
E
so  
that OFFis shown in highlighted video. This set-  
ting is made individually for each input, so be cer-  
tain to make any desired change for each input  
source where you wish to turn the conversion cir-  
cuitry off.  
Should you wish to return the conversion circuitry  
to the On position at any time, simply use the  
‹ ›  
Set Button  
F. The AUDIOSETUPmenu  
(Figure 3) will appear.  
steps shown above, but press the  
/
Navigation Button  
E
so that ONis shown in  
*
AUDIO  
SETUP  
*
highlighted video.  
It is easiest to complete the surround setup using  
the full-OSD on-screen menus. From the  
⁄ ¤  
TONE  
BASS  
:IN  
:0  
OUT  
The final input setting is also individual to each  
input, and it allows you to set the priority for the  
video conversion circuitry. In most cases, where  
only one type of video connection is made  
between a source device and the AVR you will not  
need to change this setting, and if all other  
parameters have been adjusted to meet your sys-  
tem requirements, you may proceed to the next  
⁄ ¤  
TREBLE  
:0  
MASTERmenu (Figure 1), press the  
/
but-  
ADC  
SAMPLING :48k  
96k  
tons  
SURROUNDSELECTmenu. Press the  
Set Button so that the SURROUND  
SELECTmenu (Figure 4) is on the screen.  
E
until the cursor is next to the  
BACK  
TO MASTER MENU  
F
**  
SURROUND  
SELECT  
**  
Figure 3  
©
DOLBY  
DTS  
SURROUND  
The first line controls whether or not the bass/tre-  
ble tone controls are in the signal path. The nor-  
mal default is for them to be in-line, but if you  
wish to remove them from the circuit for “flat”  
response, first make certain that the © cursor is  
pointing to the TONE line on the menu and press  
‹ ›  
configuration steps by pressing the  
Navigation Button  
pointing to BACKTOMASTERMENUand  
then pressing the Set Button  
/
LOGIC  
7
E
until the © cursor is  
DSP  
(SURR)  
STEREO  
F
.
BACK  
TO  
MASTER  
MENU  
In some cases when you wish to set a specific  
input for the video conversion circuits, a change  
to the setting here is required. In the Automatic  
mode, the AVR will scan all video inputs and route  
the first signal it encounters to the component  
output. However, in advanced systems, or when  
more than one video input is connected to the  
same source, you may want to bypass the auto-  
matic selection and manually choose which signal  
is converted.  
the  
/
Navigation Button  
E
so that OUT  
is highlighted in reverse video.  
Figure 4  
If you wish to leave the tone controls in the signal  
path, the amount off boost or cut for bass and  
⁄ ¤  
Each of the option lines on this menu (Figure 4)  
selects the surround mode category, and within  
each of those categories there will be a choice of  
the specific mode options. The choice of modes  
will vary according to the speaker configuration in  
your system.  
treble may be adjusted by pressing the  
/
Navigation Button  
next to the line for the setting you wish to adjust.  
Next, press the  
until the desired setting is shown.  
E
so that the © cursor is  
‹ ›  
/
Navigation Button  
E
When the SURRBACKline of the  
For example, in some cases both component and  
standard composite video outputs from a set-top  
box may be connected to the AVR so that the  
component signal is fed to a digital video display  
and the composite signal to a recorder. In this  
case you would not want the composite signal  
converted, but rather have the component signal  
passed through to the main output with the com-  
posite.  
This menu also includes a setting to turn the unit’s  
upsampling feature on or off. In normal use, this  
feature is turned off, which means that digital  
sources are processed at their native sample rate.  
For example, a 48kHz digital source will be  
processed at 48kHz. However, the AVR allows you  
to upsample the incoming 48kHz signals to 96kHz  
for added resolution.  
SPEAKERSETUPmenu (Figure 9) is set to  
NONEthe AVR will be configured for 5.1-chan-  
nel operation, and only the modes appropriate to  
a five-speaker system will appear.  
When the SURRBACKline of the  
SPEAKERSETUPmenu (Figure 9) is set to  
SMALLor LARGEthe AVR will be configured  
for 6.1/7.1-channel operation, and additional  
modes such as Dolby Digital EX and 7 STEREO or  
Logic 7 7.1 will appear, as they are only available  
when seven main speakers are present. In  
addition, the modes DTS ES (Discrete) and  
DTS+NEO:6 (DTS ES Matrix) available in the AVR  
will not appear unless a digital source is playing  
the correct bitstream.  
⁄ ¤  
/
To take advantage of this feature, press the  
Navigation Button  
next to the UPSAMPLINGline and press the  
‹ ›  
E
so that the © cursor is  
To make this type of system configuration first  
make certain that the IN/OUTSETUPmenu  
⁄ ¤  
/
Navigation Button  
E
so that ONis  
(Figure 2) is on the screen, Next, press the  
/
highlighted in reverse video. Note that this feature  
is only available for the Dolby Pro Logic II-Music,  
Dolby Pro Logic II Movie, Dolby Pro Logic and  
Dolby 3 Stereo modes.  
Navigation Button  
E
until the cursor is  
pointing to V-CONVPORT. When the default  
of AUTOis shown the unit will first look at the  
CVBS (composite video) input, then to the S-video  
22 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Configuration  
Note: When a Dolby Digital or DTS source is  
selected and playing, the AVR will select the appro-  
priate surround mode automatically, no matter  
which surround mode was selected for that input  
as default. Then no other surround modes will be  
available, except all Pro Logic II modes with Dolby  
Digital 2 channel (2.0) recordings.  
• Dimension: This setting alters the perceived  
depth of the surround field by creating a shal-  
lower presentation that appears to move  
sounds toward the front of the room, or a deep-  
er presentation that appears to move the center  
of the sound field toward the back of the room.  
The setting of “O” is a neutral default, with the  
range of adjustment shown as “R-3” for a  
deeper, rear-oriented sound to “F-3” for a shal-  
lower, front-oriented sound.  
MAX: When MAX is in the highlighted video,  
a more severe compression algorithm will be  
applied.  
When you want to use the Night mode feature,  
we recommend that you select the MID setting as  
a starting point and change to the MAX setting  
later, if desired.  
To select the mode that will be used as the initial  
Note that the Night mode may be adjusted direct-  
ly any time that Dolby Digital surround mode is  
⁄ ¤  
/
default for an input, first press the  
buttons  
E
until the on-screen cursor is next to the  
desired mode’s master category name. Next, press  
selected by pressing the Night button  
B. When  
• Panorama: Switch this setting on or off to add  
an enveloping wrap-around presentation that  
increases the perception of sound along the  
sides of the room.  
the button is pressed, the words D-RANGEfol-  
lowed by the current setting (MID, MAX, OFF)  
will appear in the lower third of the video screen  
the Set Button  
F
E
to view the sub-menu. Press  
‹ ›  
the  
/
Buttons  
to scroll through the avail-  
¤
able choices, and then press the  
Button  
E
and in the Main Information Display  
˜.  
so that the cursor is next to BACK TO MASTER  
MENU to continue the setup process.  
⁄ ¤  
/
Press the  
buttons  
E
within five seconds  
⁄ ¤  
/
while the DOLBY SUR-  
To change these parameters, press the  
Navigation Buttons  
to select the desired setting, then press Set  
to confirm the setting.  
F
E
ROUND menu is on the screen until the © cursor  
is pointing to the line on the menu with the  
parameter you wish to change. Then, press the  
‹ ›  
On the Dolbymenu (Figure 5), the selection  
choices include Dolby Digital, Dolby Pro Logic II  
and IIx Music, Dolby Pro Logic II and IIx Cinema,  
Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Virtual Speaker Reference  
and Wide, and Dolby 3 Stereo. A complete expla-  
nation of these modes is found on Page 33.  
The Dolby Digital EX mode is only available when  
the system is set for 6.1/7.1 operation by config-  
uring the Surround Back speakers to “Small” or  
“Large” as described on page 27. When a disc is  
playing that contains a special “flag” signal in the  
digital audio data stream, the EX mode will be  
selected automatically. It may also be selected  
using this menu or through the front panel or  
remote controls. A complete explanation of these  
modes is found on page 33.  
On the DTSmenu, the selection choices made  
‹ ›  
/
with the  
Buttons  
E
on the remote are  
/ Navigation Buttons  
E
to alter the set-  
determined by a combination of the type of DTS  
program material in use and whether the 5.1 or  
6.1/7.1 speaker output configuration is in use.  
ting to your taste.  
Note that when the Dolby Digital mode is selected  
there are additional settings available for the  
Night mode that are associated with the surround  
mode only, not with the input. That´s why these  
settings must be made only once, not with each  
input in use.  
When the 5.1 configuration is in use the AVR will  
automatically select the 5.1 version of DTS  
processing when a DTS data stream is received.  
When the 6.1/7.1 mode is selected, the DTS-ES  
Discrete mode will automatically be activated  
when a DTS source with the ES Discrete “flag” is  
in use and the DTS-ES Matrix mode will be acti-  
vated when an ES-Matrix encoded audio track is  
received. In both cases the appropriate surround  
mode will be indicated in the Lower Display  
**  
DOLBY  
SURROUND  
DOLBY DIGITAL  
WIDTH:  
**  
MODE:  
CENTER  
---  
---  
---  
MAX  
DIMENSION  
PANORAMA  
NIGHT:OFF  
:
:
When the © cursor is pointing to the MODE  
Line  
˜
in the front panel display and on the  
‹ ›  
line, press the / Navigation Buttons  
E
to  
MID  
screen. When a non-ES DTS disc is in use, when  
the 6.1/7.1 mode is chosen the unit automatically  
will select the DTS + NEO:6 mode to create a full  
eight-speaker surround mode. See page 33 for a  
complete explanation of the DTS modes.  
select the desired Dolby surround mode, again  
BACK  
TO  
SURR  
SELECT  
remembering that the choice of available modes  
will vary with the type of program material being  
played and the number of speakers in your system  
configuratioin.  
Figure 6  
Night Mode Settings  
On the Logic 7 menu, the selection choices  
The Night mode is a feature of Dolby Digital that  
uses special processing to preserve the dynamic  
range and full intelligibility of a movie sound track  
while reducing the peak level. This prevents abrupt-  
ly loud transitions from disturbing others, without  
reducing the sonic impact of a digital source. Note  
that the Night mode is only available when the  
Dolby Digital surround mode is selected.  
**  
DOLBY  
SURROUND  
**  
‹ ›  
made with the  
/
Buttons  
E
on the remote  
are determined by whether the 5.1 or 6.1/7.1  
speaker output configuration is in use. In either  
case, the selection of a Logic 7 mode enables  
Harman Kardon’s exclusive Logic 7 processing to  
create fully enveloping, multichannel surround from  
either two-channel Stereo or Matrix-encoded pro-  
gramming such as VHS cassettes, laserdiscs or tele-  
vision broadcasts produced with Dolby surround.  
MODE:  
DOLBY  
PLII  
MUSIC  
CENTER  
WIDTH:  
3
DIMENSION:  
PANORAMA:  
0
OFF  
ON  
NIGHT:  
-----  
BACK TO  
SURR  
SELECT  
To adjust the Night mode setting from the menu  
Figure 5  
press the OSD Button  
MASTERmenu appears. Then press the but-  
ton to access the AUDIOSETUPand  
press Set to select the SURROUND  
SETUPmenu. Press Set to select the  
DOLBYmenu (see fig. 5).  
L
so that the  
In the 5.1 configuration you may select the Logic  
7/5.1 Music, Cinema or Enhanced modes. They  
work best with two-channel music, surround-  
encoded programs or standard two-channel pro-  
gramming of any type, respectively. When the  
6.1/7.1 mode is selected, the Logic 7/7.1 Music or  
Cinema modes are available, but the output will be  
in a full eight-channel sound field. Note that the  
Logic 7 modes are not available when either Dolby  
Digital or DTS Digital soundtracks are in use.  
¤
When Dolby Pro Logic II Music or Dolby Pro Logic  
IIx Music is selected as the listening mode, three  
special settings are available to tailor the sound  
field to your listening room environment and your  
individual taste and preferences. (When other  
Dolby Surround modes are selected, dotted lines  
will indicate that these settings are not active.)  
E
F
F
To adjust the Night mode setting, make certain  
that the cursor is on the NIGHTline of the  
‹ ›  
DOLBYmenu. Next, press  
/
Buttons  
E
• Center Width: This setting adjusts the balance of  
the vocal information in the front soundstage  
between the center and front left/right speakers.  
The lower settings spread the center channel  
sound more broadly into the left and right chan-  
nels. A higher number (up to “7”) produces a  
tighter center channel presentatioin.  
to choose between the following settings.  
OFF: When OFF is highlighted, the Night mode  
will not function.  
On the DSP (SURR) menu, the selection  
‹ ›  
/
choices made with the  
Buttons  
E
on the  
remote select one of the DSP surround modes  
that are designed for use with two-channel stereo  
programs to create a variety of sound field pre-  
MID: When MID is in the highlighted video,  
a mild compression will be applied.  
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Configuration  
sentations. The choices available are Hall 1, Hall 2, or what the dimensions of your listening room  
Automatic when the menu appears on the  
screen.  
or Theater. The Hall and Theater modes are  
designed for multichannel installations. See pages  
33 and 34 for a complete explanation of the DSP  
surround modes. Note that the Hall and Theater  
modes are not available when a Dolby Digital or  
DTS soundtrack is played.  
are.  
We recommend that you take advantage of the  
precision of EzSet/EQ to calibrate your system, but  
if desired you may also make any of the configu-  
ration settings manually, or trim the settings pro-  
vided by EzSet/EQ by following the instructions on  
pages 26–31.  
• If you wish to enter the speaker crossover fre-  
quencies yourself, but want to have the  
EzSet/EQ system test for and calibrate all the  
¤
other functions listed above, press the  
Navigation Button  
E
to point the cursor at  
On the STEREO menu, the selection choices  
BACKTOMASTERMENUand then press  
‹ ›  
/
made with the  
Buttons  
E
on the remote  
the Set Button  
press the Navigation Button  
F
. At the Master Menu,  
again so  
Before starting the EzSet/EQ process, make certain  
that you have connected all speakers for your sys-  
tem and that you have both the EzSet/EQ micro-  
phone and the extender rod handy. If you have a  
standard camera tripod, attach the extender rod  
to the tripod, and then screw the microphone to  
the top of the rod. Place the tripod at your pri-  
mary listening position, at least one meter from  
the nearest speaker and adjust it so that micro-  
phone is at least one meter above ear level. If you  
do not have a tripod, simply screw the extender  
rod into the bottom of the EzSet/EQ microphone.  
may either turn the surround processing off for a  
traditional two-channel stereo presentation, or  
select 5Stereoor 7Stereodepending  
on whether the 5.1 or 6.1/7.1 output is in use.  
The latter modes feed the stereophonic input sig-  
nal to both front speakers, to the rear speakers  
and to both surround back speakers (if in use),  
while the monophonic signal parts are spread  
over all speakers, also the Center. See page 30 for  
a complete explanation of the 5 Stereo and 7  
Stereo modes.  
¤
E
that the cursor is pointing to MANUAL  
SETUPand then press the Set Button  
Once the MANUALSETUPmenu (Fig. 8)  
appears, follow the instructions on page 28 to  
enter your desired settings for the Crossover  
Frequencies, and then return to the  
F.  
¤
EZSET/EQMODEmenu. Press the  
Navigation Button  
sor is pointing to MANUALand then press the  
Set Button . When the interim message  
E
again so that the cur-  
F
To listen to an analog stereo source without any  
bass management, so that the left and right front  
speakers receive a full-range signal, straight  
through from the input gain section to the volume  
‹ ›  
screen appears to remind you to set the  
crossovers, make sure that the cursor is pointing  
to CONTINUEand press the Set Button  
Next, plug the microphone into the EzSet/EQ  
Microphone Jack  
˘
located behind the Front  
Panel Control Door. The microphone cable is  
approximately 6 meters long, which should  
accommodate most listening room situations. If  
required, you may use an optional extension  
cable, available at most electronics stores, for use  
in larger rooms. However, we recommend that you  
make every effort to avoid using extension cords  
for the microphone cable as they may adversely  
affect the test results.  
F
again since you have already set the  
control, press the  
/
Navigation Button  
E
crossovers.  
so that SURROUNDOFFappears in the high-  
lighted video. To listen to two-channel analog  
sources while taking advantage of the AVR’s bass-  
‹ ›  
Step 3. The FARFIELDMEASUREscreen  
(Figure 7a) will appear with instructions to place  
the microphone, if you have not already done so.  
This screen is also the place to set the master vol-  
ume level. As noted on the screen, use the  
management system, press the  
/
Navigation  
Button  
E
so that SURROUNDOFF+DSP  
appears in the highlighted video.  
Volume Control  
ıd  
to adjust the volume  
After the selections are made in the Dolby, DTS,  
Logic 7, DSP (Surround) or Stereo menus, press  
⁄ ¤  
level to –28dB, as shown on the line that appears  
at the bottom of the menu when the volume is  
You are now ready to start the EzSet/EQ process  
by following these steps:  
the  
/
buttons  
E
so that the cursor moves  
adjusted. Press the Set Button  
F
when the  
to the BACK TO SURRSELECTline and  
volume is set to the proper level.  
Step 1. Navigate to the EZSET/EQMODE  
menu (Fig. 7) by first pressing the OSD Button  
¤
presss the Set Button  
F.  
* FAR FIELD MEASURE *  
Place microphone 3ft/1m  
above ear level at  
L
on the remote. Press the Navigation  
Using EzSet/EQ  
Button  
E
until the cursor is pointing to  
The AVR 635 uses Harman Kardon’s EzSet/EQ  
technology to automatically configure your system  
to deliver the best possible performance based on  
your specific speaker selection, where the speak-  
ers are placed in the room and the acoustic influ-  
ences in your listening room. By using a series of  
test signals and the processing power of the Texas  
Instruments DA 610 digital signal processor,  
EzSet/EQ eliminates the need for manual adjust-  
ment of speaker “size”, crossover, delay and out-  
put level settings while it adds the power of a  
multi-band parametric equalizer to smooth out  
the frequency settings for optimal sound repro-  
duction.  
listening position, at  
least 3 ft/1m away from  
the closest speaker.  
Set volume to -28dB  
EZSET/EQin the MASTERMENU. Press  
the Set Button  
F
to bring the menu to the  
screen.  
CONTINUE  
BACK TO EZSET/EQ MODE  
BACK TO MASTER MENU  
VOLUME: -28dB  
*
EZSET/EQ  
MODE  
*
AUTOMATIC  
MANUAL  
Figure 7a  
BACK  
TO  
MASTER  
MENU  
Step 4. The final menu screen before the  
EzSet/EQ process starts is a warning screen  
(Figure 7b) that serves as a reminder to keep the  
room as quiet as possible while the system is in  
use. Extraneous noise of any kind may adversely  
affect the accuracy of the system’s results. Do not  
talk while the test tones are circulating, and if  
possible, turn off any ventilation systems if the  
noise form the air flow is loud enough for you to  
hear. Should an outside noise such as a phone  
ringing occur during the test process, we recom-  
mend that you rerun EzSet/EQ. This screen is also  
your reminder that the test tones used by  
Figure 7  
Step 2. Select one of the two options shown  
based on the way you wish to have the system  
settings entered:  
In addition to making system setup quick and  
easy, EzSet/EQ is more precise than manual set-  
tings. With EzSet/EQ you are able to calibrate your  
system in a fraction of the time it would take to  
enter the settings manually, and with results that  
rival those achieved with expensive test equip-  
ment and time consuming procedures. The end  
result is a system calibration profile that enables  
your new receiver to deliver the best possible  
sound no matter what type of speakers you have  
• In most cases, you will want to use the  
Automatic mode, which calibrates the system  
for speaker presence, speaker “size”, speaker  
crossover, channel output level, speaker-to-lis-  
tener delay time and room equalization. To  
choose this mode simply press the Set Button  
EzSet/EQ are somewhat loud. Anyone with sensi-  
tive hearing should leave the room or use hearing  
protection before moving to the next step. If you  
F
, as the cursor is already pointing to  
24 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Configuration  
do not wish to start the test process at this time,  
the right or left side of your listening room.) For  
that reason, we strongly recommend that you try  
to listen as the tone circulates, matching the  
name shown for each channel to the location of  
the speaker. If a tone is heard from a speaker  
position that does not match the on-screen mes-  
sage, make a note of the incorrect speaker con-  
nections. When the test process stops you will see  
a message indicating the they Far Field measure-  
ments are complete, but since there is a connec-  
¤
* FAR FIELD EQ ERROR *  
Detected speaker config  
⁄ ¤  
press the  
/
Navigation Button  
E
to  
FL  
: YES  
SBR: YES  
SBL: YES  
SL : YES  
SUB: YES  
return to either the EzSet/EQ menu or the Master  
Menu, and press the Set Button . To begin  
CEN : YES  
FR  
SR  
: YES  
: NO  
F
the EzSet/EQ Near Field measurements, press the  
Verify spkr connections  
Verify mic position  
‹ ›  
/
Navigation Button  
E
so that ONis  
Reduce background noise  
highlighted in reverse video, and press the Set  
Button  
BACK TO MASTER MENU  
F
.
NOTE: Once the EzSet/EQ process starts, the vol-  
ume control and Standby/Off switches are tem-  
porarily disabled while the tests are in progress.  
Do not adjust the volume or turn the unit off until  
you see the on-screen message change to indi-  
cate that EzSet/EQ is finished.  
Figure 7d  
tion error press the Navigation Button  
E
Step 7b. In some cases, the system may not  
function properly due to overly high output levels.  
When this occurs, you will see the message  
shown in Figure 7e. If you see this message verify  
that that the microphone is in the correct posi-  
tion, and not too close to any one speaker. Then  
so that the on-screen cursor in Fig. 7 is pointing  
to RETURNTOMASTERMENUand press  
the Set Button  
F. At this point, exit all menus  
and turn the receiver off. Check all speaker wire  
connections and then rerun EzSet/EQ.  
WARNING !!  
Step 6. When the Far Field tests are complete a  
message screen will appear to confirm if the pro- MASTERMENU. From there, return to the  
cedure was successful or not. In most cases there  
will not be any problems and you will see the  
message shown in Figure 7c on your screen. If the the system volume level by 3dB before trying  
press the Set Button  
F
to go back to the  
During measurement  
Please maintain silence  
While several loud sound  
bursts are heard.  
EzSet/EQ system and when you are once again at  
the FARFIELDMEASUREscreen, reduce  
START : OFF ON  
BACK TO EZSET/EQ MENU  
BACK TO MASTER MENU  
speaker positions shown match the actual speak-  
EzSet/EQ again.  
er layout in your system, press the Set Button  
* EZSET/EQ ERROR *  
F
to complete EzSet/EQ by performing the  
Near Field Measurements. Continue the EzSet/EQ  
process by pressing the Set Button to take  
Figure 7b  
An overload detected.  
Please verify mic  
position.  
IMPORTANT NOTE: Anyone with hearing that is  
sensitive to loud noises should leave the room at  
this point, or use ear protection sufficient to  
reduce the noise level at their ears. Inexpensive  
foam-style ear plugs, available at most drug  
stores, may be used to reduce the sound level to  
a tolerable level for anyone who has a problem  
with loud noise. If you are uncomfortable with, or  
cannot tolerate loud sounds and do not use some  
sort of ear protection we strongly recommend  
that you leave the room and ask someone else to  
be present while the EzSet/EQ process takes  
place, or that you do not use EzSet/EQ and enter  
the configuration settings manually, as described  
on pages 26 through 31.  
F
Reduce the volume by  
3 dB and repeat the  
procedure.  
the Near Field measurements from the front left,  
center and right speakers. By taking this separate  
set of measurements, the AVR 635 is able to com-  
plete its view of the room’s sonic signature and  
apply equalization as needed to correct spikes  
and dips in the system’s response. Continue these  
instructions with Step 8.  
BACK TO MASTER MENU  
Figure 7e  
Step 8. When the Far Field measurements are  
completed, the system will ask you to take three  
Near Field measurements, one at each front  
speaker position. These measurements enable  
EzSet/EQ to produce the most accurate settings  
for both high and low frequency equalization. The  
Near Field measurements are similar to the Far  
Field tests, except that the system will “listen” to  
only one speaker at a time, rather than sending  
the test signals to all speakers in rotation. At the  
NEARFIELDEQSELECTmenu (Figure  
7f), you will see an instruction to place the micro-  
phone in a different position than the one used  
for the initial Far Field measurements. This time,  
place the microphone close to the speaker to be  
measured, at a distance of about 1 meter. In addi-  
tion, the top of the microphone should be pointed  
towards the speaker, rather than pointing up as  
was done for the Far Field tests. For the first  
measurement, place the microphone so that it is  
close to, and pointing towards, the front left  
speaker, and with the on-screen cursor point-  
ing to 1.FLSPEAKER, and press the Set  
* FAR FIELD COMPLETE *  
Detected speaker config  
FL  
: YES  
SBR: YES  
SBL: YES  
SL : YES  
SUB: YES  
CEN : YES  
FR  
SR  
: YES  
: YES  
DO NEAR FIELD  
BACK TO MASTER MENU  
Step 5. At this point you will begin to hear a  
series of test tones circulate among all the speak-  
ers in your system. While this is happening, the  
AVR 635 is reading the signal to determine which  
speaker positions are active, what type of speaker  
is present at each active position, what the dis-  
tance is from the listening position to each speak-  
er, and to begin to build a profile of the impact of  
the room’s acoustics on the quality of audio  
reproduction. When the test is completed you will  
hear the tones stop, and the system will pause  
fors long as a minute while the processor makes  
its calculations. Do not be alarmed if the “WARN-  
ING” message remains on the screen after tones  
stop until a results message is displayed as shown  
in Step 6 or 7, below.  
Figure 7c  
Step 7a. If the measurements are not successful  
due to a missing or malfunctioning speaker, the  
FARFIELDEQERRORmessage will  
appear as shown in Figure 7d. EzSet/EQ is pro-  
grammed to look for speaker pairs at the front  
left/front right, surround left/surround right and  
surround back left/surround back right positions.  
If the test results indicate that one, but not both  
of the speakers in any of these pairs is present,  
the menu will show NOnext to the speaker posi-  
tion where the tests did not report back that a  
speaker is present. Should this message appear,  
make note of the suspect speaker location, exit all Button  
menus and turn the receiver off. Check all speaker  
wire connections and then rerun EzSet/EQ.  
F.  
NOTE: While these tests detect whether a speak-  
er is connected to a particular output, they cannot  
determine whether the speaker is in the correct  
position. (For example, it can tell whether a  
speaker is connected to the Surround Right out-  
put, but it cannot tell whether the speaker is on  
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Configuration  
After checking these two items, as needed, make  
certain that the cursor is pointing to the BACK  
TONEARFIELDline and press the Set  
* NEAR FIELD EQ SELECT *  
* MANUAL SETUP *  
Please select  
1. FL Speaker  
2. C Speaker  
EZSET EQ : OFF ON  
EZSET ADJUST  
SPEAKER SIZE  
Button  
F. This will return you to the NEAR  
3. FR Speaker  
SPEAKER XOVER  
DELAY ADJUST  
FIELDEQSELECTmenu (Figure 7f) where  
you should repeat Steps 8 through 11, adjusting  
the mike placement and volume level as needed  
until the NEARFIELDCOMPLETEmenu  
(Figure 7g) appears after the test tone stops.  
BACK TO MASTER MENU  
CHANNEL ADJUST  
BACK TO MASTER MENU  
Figure 7f  
Figure 8  
* NEAR FIELD ERROR *  
Step 9. You will now see a Warning message  
similar to the one shown in Figure 7 except that it  
will contain an option to return to the NEAR  
FIELDEQSELECTmenu (Figure 7f) as  
well as the ability to return to the MASTER  
MENU. If you are ready to proceed with the test,  
make certain that the microphone is properly  
pointed toward the speaker selected for calibra-  
If you have already run the EzSet/EQ calibration  
system, the first line of the menu enables you to  
hear the difference between the settings estab-  
lished by EzSet/EQ. The default setting is ON,  
which plays the incoming source with the  
EzSet/EQ settings. To hear the system in a Bypass  
mode, with none of the equalization filters in the  
‹ ›  
Near Field Eq was not  
successful.  
Please check mic  
Placement and volume  
Setting  
BACK TO NEAR FIELD  
BACK TO MASTER MENU  
circuit path, press the  
/
Navigation Button  
tion, press the Navigation Button  
E
so  
Figure 7h  
E
so that OFFis highlighted. Note that once  
that ONis highlighted and press the Set Button  
changed, this setting will remain until you change  
it again in this menu. While you may want to use  
this menu option to hear the difference that  
EzSet/EQ makes, we recommend that you leave  
the setting on to take advantage of the benefits  
of EzSet/EQ’s advanced room correction technolo-  
gy.  
When both the Far Field and Near Field measure-  
ments have been successfully completed your sys-  
tem is ready for use. Thanks to EzSet/EQ, the set-  
tings for speaker “size”, speaker crossover, chan-  
nel output and individual channel delay time have  
been automatically set and require no further  
adjustment. In addition, EzSet/EQ also performs a  
complete room equalization that tailors the sys-  
tem’s performance for the best possible sound  
with your combination of speakers, speaker place-  
ment and room acoustics. The next few pages in  
this manual detail the procedure for manually  
entering system data, but unless you want to  
F
.
Step 10. One short test signal will be sent to the  
speaker position being calibrated and after a  
slight pause fro the system to calculate the test  
results, you will see either a “Near Field  
Complete” message or a “Near Field Error” mes-  
sage. In most cases, the “Complete” message will  
appear, in which case you should proceed to Step  
11, if an “Error” message appears, go to Step 12.  
The EZSETADJUSTline on the menu  
enables you to set the system’s Tilt, or high-fre-  
quency boost. To make this adjustment, first make  
sure that EZSETEQline is set to ON, as this  
item is not available when EzSet EQ is not in the  
signal path. When the cursor is on the EZSET  
Step 11. If the test results were successful, the  
message shown in Figure 7g will appear. In order  
to properly calibrate the system, you will need to  
run the Near Field tests for all three front channel  
speakers (left, center and right). After running the  
test for the front left speaker, make certain that  
the cursor is pointing towards BACKTO  
view the setting information and make an adjust- ADJUSTline, press the Set Button  
F
E
, and  
to  
‹ ›  
ment, you are now ready to enjoy the finest in  
home theater and music reproduction. Go to  
page 35 for complete information on operating  
your AVR 635.  
then press the  
/
Navigation Button  
enter the desired setting. When you have com-  
pleted your adjustment, press the Navigation  
Button  
BACKTOMANUALSETUPline and press  
the Set Button  
E
to move the cursor down to the  
NEARFIELDand press the Set Button  
F
. When you are taken back to the Near Field  
Manual Setup  
F
.
Select menu (Figure 7f) where you should repeat  
Steps 8 through 11 until all three front speakers  
have been calibrated. When that is done the  
EzSet/EQ process is complete and you should  
In most cases it is simpler, easier and more accu-  
rate to let EzSet/EQ take care of entering the sys-  
tem parameters for speaker “size”, speaker  
crossover, channel output and individual channel  
delay time. However, if you feel that your listening  
room or system components are best suited to  
manual entry of these settings, the AVR 635 also  
allows you to enter or trim any of these tradition-  
al system parameters. Even if you do make the  
settings manually, we recommend that you run  
the EzSet/EQ tests first so that a baseline setting  
is established, and then make your adjustments  
from there. Note that once EzSet/EQ has been run  
you do not need to adjust all system settings, only  
those that you want to adjust.  
Note on Manual Setup Menus: Each of the  
four major manual setup menus (Speaker Size,  
Speaker Crossover, Delay Adjust and Channel  
Adjust) includes a line that reads EZSET  
SETTINGS. When the default setting of  
OFFis shown you are able to make any required  
adjustments that are available on that menu.  
However, you may change the setting to ONat  
any time to recall the settings established when  
EzSet/EQ was last run. It is also important to note  
that when the EzSet/EQ settings are in use, the  
AVR will not allow any changes to be made. To  
¤
press the Navigation Button  
E
to return  
to the Master Menu.  
* NEAR FIELD COMPLETE *  
EZSET/EQ has success-  
Fully performed  
Near Field Eq for  
the selected speaker.  
BACK TO NEAR FIELD  
BACK TO MASTER MENU  
‹ ›  
/
trim the settings press the  
Navigation  
Button until the cursor is on the EZSET  
E
SETTINGSline on the menu in use and press  
Figure 7g  
‹ ›  
/
the  
Navigation Button  
E
to change the  
To view or change the current settings, press the  
Step 12. If a “Near Field Error” message  
setting to OFF. This will allow you to make  
changes to the settings on that menu.  
OSD Button  
L
on the remote to bring up the  
appears, as shown in Figure 7h, you should check  
to make certain that the microphone is about one  
meter from the speaker being tested and that the  
top of the microphone unit is pointing towards  
the speaker. You may also have to raise or lower  
the master volume to achieve accurate readings.  
¤
MASTERMENU(Figure 1). Next, press the  
Navigation Button as needed until the  
cursor is on the MANUALSETUPline. Press  
the Set Button to view the MANUAL  
SETUPmenu (Figure 8).  
E
F
26 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Configuration  
Speaker Setup  
On the SPEAKERSIZEmenu (Figure 9),  
you will see either the factory default settings or,  
if EzSet/EQ has been run, the settings recorded  
by the test results. In the case for the main  
speaker channels, each speaker position (front  
left/right, center, surround left/right and surround  
back left/right) you have the option of telling the  
system if the speakers used are “small” or  
“large”. These descriptions do not describe the  
actual physical size of the speakers, but rather  
refer to the type of speaker. For each of these  
settings, select LARGEwhen the speakers in a  
particular position are traditional full-range loud-  
speakers. Use the SMALLsetting for smaller,  
frequency-limited “satellite” speakers that do not  
reproduce sounds below 60Hz. In all cases  
except the front left/right speakers you may also  
select NONE. This tells the system that no  
speakers are present at the particular position,  
allowing the AVR to select the correct surround  
modes that are compatible with the number of  
speakers installed. For example, in order to use  
the Dolby Digital EX, Dolby Pro Logic IIx, DTS-ES  
Logic 7/7-channel and 7 Stereo modes, you must  
have either Large or Small speakers entered as  
the setting for the Surround Back channels.  
Important Note: When a speaker set with a sub-  
woofer and two front satellites connected to the  
Sub´s speaker outputs is used, the Sub´s inputs  
must be connected to the Front speaker out-  
Although using EzSet/EQ to enter the settings for  
speaker “size” and crossover point, you may  
wish to make changes to those settings, or to  
manually enter a complete speaker profile for  
your system. In addition, for systems where you  
with to have separate speaker configuration set-  
tings for each input, rather than use the same  
settings for all inputs, you may also configure  
that option in these menus. Two separate menus  
are used to enter this information, and you may  
change the data on either or both, as needed.  
puts  
D
and LARGEmust be selected for the  
front speakers (and NONEfor the subwoofer, see  
below).  
3. When you have completed your selection for the  
¤
front channel, press the Button  
E
on the  
remote to move the cursor to CENTER.  
‹ ›  
/
4. Press the  
Buttons  
E
on the remote to  
select the option that best describes your center  
speaker, based on the speaker definitions shown  
below.  
The SPEAKERSIZEmenu tells the AVR  
about the bass reproduction capabilities of your  
speakers. This, in turn, determines which speakers  
receive bass information that is derived from  
audio tracks or specifically intended for reproduc-  
tion by low-frequency-capable speakers by the  
use of a low-frequency effects (“LFE”) channel in  
digital program sources. In addition, by telling  
the AVR whether speakers are available for the  
Surround Back channels, the information on this  
menu is used to determine which surround  
modes may be used (e.g., modes such as Dolby  
Digital EX, Dolby Pro Logic IIx, or DTS-ES, requir-  
ing SBL/SBR speakers, are only available when a  
speaker is present in those channels).  
When SMALLis selected, low-frequency center  
channel sounds will be sent to the Fronts, if they  
are set to LARGEand Sub is turned off (see  
below). When Sub is on, low frequency center  
channel sounds will be sent to the subwoofer  
only.  
When LARGEis selected, a full-range output  
will be sent to the center speaker output, and NO  
center channel signal will be sent to the sub-  
woofer output (except when the Pro Logic II  
Music mode is in use).  
NOTE: If you choose Logic 7 as the surround  
mode for the particular input source for which  
you are configuring your speakers, the AVR will  
not make the LARGE option available for the  
center speaker. This is due to the requirements of  
Logic 7 processing, and does not indicate a prob-  
lem with your receiver.  
If you are in doubt as to which setting best  
describes your speakers consult the specifications  
in the speakers’ owner’s manual, visit the speak-  
er manufacturer’s web site or ask the dealer or  
installer from whom you purchased the speakers.  
The SPEAKERX-OVERmenu is used to  
further tailor the bass management system by  
determining the frequencies at which bass infor-  
mation is sent to a specific speaker position. This  
menu also contains settings to route LFE infor-  
mation and to set the subwoofer high-pass filter  
order.  
Begin your changes to the speaker setup process  
by making certain that the cursor is pointing at  
the LEFT/RIGHTline, which sets the con-  
figuration for the front left and right speakers. If  
you wish to make a change to the front speakers’  
‹ ›  
When NONEis selected, no signals will be sent  
to the center-channel output. The receiver will  
operate in a “phantom” center channel mode.  
Center-channel information will be sent to the  
left and right front channel outputs and the cen-  
ter channel bass will be sent to the subwoofer  
output when SUBL/R+LFEis selected in  
the SUBWOOFERline in this menu (see  
below). This mode is needed if no Center speaker  
is used. Note that when the Logic 7 Cinema or  
Enhanced surround modes are selected a Center  
speaker must be used, the Logic 7 Music mode  
works well without a Center too.  
To configure the speakers in your system for use  
with the AVR 635, or to check the settings  
entered by EzSet/EQ, check the settings on the  
various sub-menu groups on the MANUAL  
SETUPmenu, starting with the SPEAKER  
SIZEmenu (Figure 9) and then check the  
other menus’ settings. To do this, go to the  
Manual Setup Menu (Figure 8) by first pressing  
configuration, press the  
/
Navigation  
Button  
E
so that either LARGEor  
SMALLappears, matching the appropriate  
description from the definitions shown above.  
IMPORTANT NOTE: If a change is made to this,  
‹ ›  
or any speaker position, when you press the  
Navigation Button  
message will appear reminding you that  
/
the OSD Button  
L
to recall the Master Menu  
E, an on-screen warning  
‹ ›  
(Figure 1). Next, press the  
Button  
ALSETUPline on the menu in use and press  
/
Navigation  
5. When you have completed your selection for  
E
until the cursor is on the MANU-  
EzSet/EQ must be run. This is necessary to inte-  
grate the changed parameter with the EzSet/EQ  
test results. Make all desired setting changes on  
the SPEAKERSETUPand SPEAKER  
X-OVERmenus once, and then run EzSet/EQ  
after all manual adjustments are completed.  
¤
the center channel, press the Button  
the remote to move the cursor to  
SURROUND.  
E
on  
the Set Button  
F
. When the MANUAL  
‹ ›  
/
SETUPMenu is shown, press the  
Navigation Button  
is on the SPEAKERSIZEline and press the  
Set Button  
‹ ›  
/
E
again until the cursor  
6. Press the  
Buttons  
E
on the remote to  
select the option that best describes the surround  
speakers in your system based on the speaker  
definitions shown on page 27.  
F
.
When SMALLis selected, low-frequency front  
channel sounds will be sent only to the subwoofer  
output. If you choose this option and there is no  
subwoofer connected, you will not hear any low-  
frequency sounds with front channel signals.  
* SPEAKER SIZE *  
LEFT/RIGHT: SMALL  
When SMALLis selected, with all digital sur-  
round modes low-frequency surround channel  
sounds will be sent to the Fronts when Sub is  
turned off or to the subwoofer output when Sub  
is on. With any analog surround mode the rear  
bass feed depends on the mode selected and the  
setting of the Sub and front speakers.  
CENTER  
: SMALL  
: SMALL  
SURROUND  
SURR BACK : NONE  
MAIN  
SUB MODE  
SUB SIZE  
: SUB  
: 10in/250mm  
When LARGEis selected, a full-range output  
will be sent to the front left and front right out-  
puts. Depending on the choice made in the  
SUBWOOFERline in this menu (see below),  
the front left and right bass information may also  
be directed to the subwoofer.  
EZSET SETTINGS: OFF ON  
BACK TO MANUAL SETUP  
When LARGEis selected, a full-range output  
will be sent to the surround channel outputs (with  
all analog and digital surround modes), and,  
Figure 9  
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Configuration  
except with Hall and Theater modes, NO surround  
channel bass will be sent to the subwoofer output.  
• If a subwoofer is connected to the AVR, you  
have the option to have the front left/right  
internal low-frequency driver, as opposed to the  
mid-range driver. The settings on the SPKRX-  
“main” speakers reproduce bass frequencies at OVERmenu also allow you to set the high pass  
When NONEis selected, surround-sound infor-  
mation will be split between the front left and  
front right outputs. For optimal performance  
when no surround speakers are in use, the Dolby  
3 Stereo mode should be used.  
all times, and have the subwoofer operate only  
when the AVR is being used with a digital  
filter that determines which frequencies go to the  
subwoofer when the AVR 635 is playing back the  
source that contains a dedicated Low Frequency low frequency effects (LFE) channel from a digital  
Effects, or LFE soundtrack. This allows you to  
use both your main and subwoofer speakers to  
take advantage of the special bass created for  
certain movies. To select that option press the  
‹ ›  
soundtrack.  
Before making any changes to the settings for the  
crossover point we suggest that you find the  
crossover point for the speakers in each of the four  
groupings, front left/right, center, surround and sur-  
round back by looking at the specifications page of  
the speaker’s owner’s manual, by getting that  
information from the manufacturer’s Web site, or  
by contacting your dealer or the manufacturer’s  
customer service department. You will need this  
figure to accurately configure the next group of  
settings.  
When you are using surround back speakers with  
¤
your system, press the Button  
E
on the  
remote to move the cursor to SURRBACK.  
This line serves two functions in that it not only  
configures the setting for the surround back  
channels when they are present, it also tells the  
AVR’s processing system to configure the unit for  
either 5.1 or 6.1/7.1 operation.  
/
Buttons  
E
on the remote so that SUB  
(LFE)appears in the on-screen menu.  
• If a subwoofer is connected and you wish to  
use it for bass reproduction in conjunction with  
the main front left/right speakers, regardless of  
the type of program source or Surround mode  
‹ ›  
‹ ›  
/
Press the  
Buttons on the remote to select the  
you are listening to, press the  
/
Buttons  
option that best describes the speakers in use at  
the left and right back surround positions based  
on the definitions on this page:  
E
on the remote so that SUBL/R+LFE  
appears in the on-screen menu. When this  
option is selected, a full-range signal will be  
sent to the front left/right “main” speakers. The  
subwoofer will receive the front left and right  
bass frequencies under the crossover frequency  
selected in another setting on this menu, as  
described below, and also the LFE soundtrack.  
The factory default setting for all speaker positions is  
100Hz. If that setting is acceptable for all channels,  
then no adjustments are needed and you may skip  
this section.  
When NONEis selected, the system will adjust  
so that only 5.1-channel surround processing/  
decoding modes are available and the surround  
back amplifier channels will not be used. When  
this is the case for your system you may wish to  
take advantage of the availability of this amplifier  
channel pair for use in powering a second set of  
speakers that have their source selected by the  
AVR’s multiroom control system. See page 38 for  
more information.  
To make changes to the speaker crossovers or  
LFE high-pass filter setting, go to the SPKRX-  
OVERsubmenu within the MANUAL  
After making any required changes to the Sub-  
SETUPmenu (Fig. 8). To do this, first press the  
⁄ ¤  
woofer Mode line, press the  
Button  
/
Navigation  
OSD Button  
MENU(Figure 1) appears. Next, press the  
Navigation Button until the cursor is on  
the MANUALSETUPline on the menu in use  
and press the Set Button . When the  
L
so that the MASTER  
E
to move the cursor to the SUB  
‹ ›  
/
SIZEline. The setting on this line enters the  
data of the size of your subwoofer’s driver so that  
the proper gain, filters and equalization settings  
will be used with EzSet/EQ.  
E
When SMALLis selected the system will adjust  
so that the full complement of 6.1/7.1 surround  
processing/decoding modes are available, and  
low-frequency information below the crossover  
point (identical with the one for the surround  
speakers) will be sent to the subwoofer output  
when the subwoofer is set to ON, or to the Front  
LEFT/RIGHT when subwoofer is set to OFF.  
F
MANUALSETUPmenu is shown, press the  
To change the setting, make certain that the cur-  
sor is on the SUBSIZEline and press the  
⁄ ¤  
‹ ›  
/
Navigation Button  
E
again until the  
cursor is on the SPEAKERX-OVERline and  
press the Set Button to view the SPKR  
/
Navigation Button  
E, so that the set-  
F
ting appears that matches the diameter of your  
subwoofer’s driver. If you do not remember what  
the size is, you can either measure the driver’s  
diameter or consult the owner’s manual for the  
speaker.  
X-OVERmenu (Figure 10).  
When LARGEis selected the system will adjust  
so that the full complement of 6.1/7.1 surround  
processing/decoding modes are available, and a  
full-range signal will be sent to the surround back  
channels, with no low-frequency information sent  
to the subwoofer output.  
* SPEAKER X-OVER *  
LEFT/RIGHT: 100 Hz  
CENTER  
: 100 Hz  
SURROUND  
: 100 Hz  
SURR BACK : 100 Hz  
LFE LP FLT: 120 Hz  
EZSET SETTINGS: OFF ON  
When you have completed the settings for speak-  
⁄ ¤  
er “size”, press the  
/
Navigation Button  
E
to move the cursor to the BACKTO  
BACK TO MANUAL SETUP  
7. When you have completed your selection for  
MANUALSETUPline to continue your  
adjustments. It is also important to remember to  
re-run the EzSet/EQ system if any changes have  
been made to the settings on this menu, follow-  
ing the instructions shown on page 26 for using  
the Manual mode.  
¤
the surround channels, press the Button  
on the remote to move the cursor to SUB  
MODE.  
E
Figure 10  
To change the setting for any of the four speaker  
groups Left/Right, Center, Surrounds or Surround  
⁄ ¤  
‹ ›  
/
8. Press the  
Buttons  
E
on the remote to  
select the option that best describes your system.  
Back, press the  
/
Buttons  
E
until the cur-  
The choices available for the subwoofer position  
will depend on the settings for the other speak-  
ers, particularly the front left/right positions.  
Speaker Crossover Setting  
sor is next to the line where you wish to make a  
change and then press the  
When all initial speaker “size” settings have been  
made, you now have the option to take advantage  
of the AVR’s Quadruple Crossover system, which  
allows individual crossover settings to be made for  
each speaker grouping set to "Small". The low-fre-  
quency crossover point is set by the design of your  
speakers.  
Note: if the Speaker is set to Large in Speaker  
Size menu the crossover is automatically set to  
40Hz when EzSet/EQ runs. It is defined as the  
frequency which is the lowest possible frequency  
the speaker is capable of reproducing, or the  
frequency at which sound is sent to the speaker’s  
‹ ›  
/
Buttons  
E
until the desired setting appears. The available  
choices at which point low-frequency information  
will be sent to the subwoofer (or to the Front  
Left/Right speakers in case subwoofer is set to  
OFF), rather than to the speaker channel, are  
40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz, 100Hz, 120Hz, 150Hz and  
200Hz. Pick the choice that is identical to the  
information for the speakers, or if an exact match  
is not possible, pick the closest choice that is  
ABOVE the speaker’s lowfrequency limit to avoid  
the creation of a low-frequency “hole” where  
your system will have no bass information.  
If the front left/right speakers are set to  
SMALL, the subwoofer will automatically be set  
to SUB, which is the “on” position.  
If the front left/right speakers are set to  
LARGE, three options are available:  
• If no subwoofer is connected to the AVR, press  
‹ ›  
/
the  
Buttons  
E
on the remote so that  
NONEappears in the on-screen menu. When  
this option is selected, all bass information will  
be routed to the front left/right “main” speakers.  
28 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Configuration  
When any needed adjustments are made to the  
crossovers, one additional adjustment is available  
to custom tailor the way information is sent to the  
subwoofer. The LFE LP FLTline adjusts the  
frequency cutoff of the low pass filter that deter-  
mines the frequency at which information is sent  
to the subwoofer when playing a digital sound-  
track that has a dedicated low frequency effects  
channel. In most cases the default frequency of  
120Hz is appropriate, since that is the frequency  
most commonly used in the creation of LFE chan-  
nels during a movie’s sound mixing process.  
However, you may wish to change the setting  
based on your individual preference or the charac-  
teristics and capabilities of your subwoofer.  
Delay Settings  
When the Set button  
and the system is ready for a change to the front  
speaker setting, the on-screen display and Main  
Information Display  
LARGEor FRONTSMALLdepending on  
the current setting. Press the  
on the front panel or the  
the remote until the desired setting is shown,  
using the instructions for “large” or “small”  
@
F
has been pressed  
Due the different distances between the listening  
position for the front channel speakers and the  
surround speakers, the amount of time it takes for  
sound to reach your ears from the front or sur-  
round speakers is different. You may compensate  
for this difference through the use of the delay  
settings to adjust the timing for the specific  
speaker placement and acoustic conditions in your  
listening room or home theater.  
˜
will read FRONT  
‹ ›  
/
⁄ ¤  
buttons 7$  
on  
/
buttons  
E
shown earlier, then press the Set button  
@F.  
To re-synchronize the front, center and surround  
channels at first measure and note the distance  
from the listening/viewing position to the front,  
center, surround and surround back (if any) speak-  
ers in meters.  
If another speaker position needs to be changed,  
‹ ›  
press the  
or the  
/
⁄ ¤  
buttons 7$on the front panel  
/
buttons  
E
on the remote to select  
a different speaker position, press the Set button  
‹ ›  
/
buttons  
@
F
and then the  
buttons 7$on the  
on the  
remote until the correct speaker setting is shown  
⁄ ¤  
front panel or the  
/
E
To change this setting when the SPEAKER  
X-OVERmenu is on the screen, press the  
⁄ ¤  
If you have already calibrated your system using  
EzSet/EQ the delay settings shown will reflect the  
results of the measurements made by EzSet/EQ.  
No further changes are needed unless you wish to  
change an item to reflect your taste or a nonstan-  
dard system configuration. To change the settings,  
follow the instructions below to enter the distance  
between the speaker’s location and your main lis-  
tening position. The measurements need not be  
accurate to the inch, as the system is designed to  
accommodate typical listening rather than a spe-  
cific “sweet spot” position.  
and press the Set button  
firm the selection.  
@
F
again to con-  
/
Navigation Button  
E
until the cursor  
is on the LFE LP FLTline and then press  
To assist in making these settings, the icons in the  
Speaker/Channel Input Indicators will  
‹ ›  
/
the  
Navigation Button  
E
until the  
Ú
desired setting is shown in highlighted video.  
change as the speaker type is selected at each  
position. When only the inner icon box is lit, the  
speaker is set for “small.” When the inner box and  
the two outer boxes with circles inside them are  
lit, the speaker is set for “large." When no indica-  
tor appears at a speaker location, that position is  
set for “none” or “no” speaker.  
When all changes to Speaker Crossover settings  
⁄ ¤  
have been made, press the  
Button  
TOMANUALSETUPmenu and then press-  
ing the Set Button so that you may make  
/
Navigation  
E
until the cursor is on the BACK  
F
any other adjustments to the system parameters.  
It is also important to remember to rerun the  
EzSet/EQ system if any changes have been made  
to the settings on this menu, following the  
instructions shown on page 26 for using the  
Manual mode.  
In addition to adjusting the delay time for each  
individual speaker position, the AVR is among the  
few A/V receivers that allows you to adjust the  
delay for the combined output of all speakers as a  
group. This feature is called A/V Sync Delay; it  
allows you to compensate for delays to the video  
image that may be caused by the processing in  
products such as digital video displays, video  
scalers, digital cable or satellite systems, or per-  
sonal video recorders. With proper adjustment of  
the setting for A/V Sync Delay, you can eliminate  
the loss of lip sync that may be caused by digital  
video applications.  
Note: These icons are available only when  
making setup changes without the use of the full  
OSD mode.  
As an example, in the Figure below, all speakers  
are set for “large,” and a subwoofer is set.  
The Speaker Configuration may also be changed  
at any time without using the full-OSD on-screen  
menu system by pressing the Speaker Selector  
6
on the front panel or  
b
on the remote con-  
trol. Once the button is pressed, FRONT  
SPEAKERwill appear in both the lower third  
of the video display and the Main Information  
Display  
˜.  
The Delay setting for all speakers configured for  
your system will be available only (with 5.1 or  
with 6.1/7.1 configuration) when any Dolby sur-  
round mode is selected (except Dolby-3-Stereo).  
In addition they are selectable with these modes  
only, with all other modes the delay times are  
fixed. Note that the Delay settings are "Global"  
for all inputs, using those Dolby modes, and need  
not to be repeated with any input.  
‹ ›  
Within five seconds, either press the  
/
⁄ ¤  
buttons  
7$on the front panel or the  
/
buttons  
E
on the remote to select a different speaker  
position, or press the Set Button  
@F  
to begin  
the adjustment process for the front left and right  
speakers.  
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Configuration  
⁄ ¤  
/
To start with the delay settings at first select any  
input associated with such a Dolby mode. Next,  
continue within the MANUALSETUPmenu  
(Figure 8). If the system is not already at that  
To adjust the A/V Sync delay, press the  
Output Level Adjustment  
Navigation Button so that the © cursor is Output level adjustment is a key part of the con-  
pointing to the A/VSYNCDELAYline on  
Navigation  
Button to delay the sound sufficiently so  
E
figuration of any surround-sound product. It is  
particularly important for a digital receiver such  
as the AVR, as correct outputs ensure that you  
hear sound tracks with the proper directionality  
and intensity.  
‹ ›  
/
the menu and then press the  
point, press the OSD button  
L
to bring up the  
three  
E
¤
master menu. Press the Button  
E
that it matches the on-screen video.  
times or until the on-screen cursor is pointing  
Note that the A/V Sync delay setting is unique to  
each video input source, so you may enter a dif-  
ferent set-ting to compensate for the differences  
between any product attached to the Video 1, 2,  
3 or 4 inputs.  
at the DELAYADJUSTline. Press the Set  
In most cases, you will not need to make any  
adjustments to the output level, as the settings  
made by running EzSet/EQ are as accurate as  
those made manually. However, you are able to  
use the CHANNELADJUSTmenu to trim  
the settings to suit your personal preferences or  
to configure the system so that the output set-  
tings are different from one input source to  
another. The ability to make individual output  
level adjustments on a per-input basis is useful  
for listeners who may prefer different settings for  
the subwoofer or an individual channel group  
such as the front speakers when playing musical  
selections via the CD input as opposed to the  
movie soundtracks more frequently used with the  
DVD input. This menu also allows you to adjust  
the output levels using external sources such as a  
test disc or other program material that you use  
as a standard, rather than the system’s test tone.  
Button  
F
to call up the menu.  
* DELAY ADJUST *  
FL :12.0 ft  
CEN:12.0 ft  
FR :12.0 ft  
SR :10.0 ft  
SBR:10.0 ft  
SBL:10.0 ft  
SL :10.0 ft  
SUB:12.0 ft  
When the delay settings are complete, press the  
¤
Button  
E
once so that the cursor is next to  
UNIT: FEET METER  
A/V SYNC DELAY  
EZSET SETTINGS  
the BACKTOMANUALSETUPmenu line  
and press the Set Button pto return to the  
MANUALSETUPmenu.  
: 0Ms  
: OFF ON  
BACK TO MANUAL SETUP  
Note that the delay settings may also be adjusted  
at any time when the Dolby Digital or Dolby Pro  
Logic II modes are in use by pressing the Delay  
⁄ ¤  
Figure 11  
button on the remote  
Z
. Then press the  
/
Next move the cursor to the UNITline and  
E
buttons on the remote to select the Center  
or Rear channels for adjustment, followed by a  
F. Next, press the  
on the remote until the  
desired figure appears in the Main Information  
Display and press the Set button p  
select the unit for distances you prefer to enter,  
feet or meter. Then move the cursor to the FL  
press of the Set button  
line where the first adjustment is made. Now  
⁄ ¤  
/
‹ ›  
/
buttons  
E
press the  
Buttons  
E
until the distance  
from the front left speaker to the preferred listen-  
¤
˜
ing position is entered. Next press the Button  
twice to confirm the setting and return to the  
normal display.  
E
once to move to the next line.  
NOTE: Listeners are often confused about the  
operation of the surround channels. While some  
assume that sound should always be coming  
from each speaker, most of the time there will be  
little or no sound in the surround channels. This  
is because they are only used when a movie  
director or sound mixer specifically places sound  
there to create ambience, a special effect or to  
continue action from the front of the room to the  
rear. When the output levels are properly set, it  
is normal for surround speakers to operate only  
occasionally. Artificially increasing the volume to  
the rear speakers may destroy the illusion of an  
enveloping sound field that duplicates the way  
you hear sound in a movie theater or concert hall.  
Now the cursor will be at the CENline so that  
the delay for the center speaker may be set. Press  
‹ ›  
the  
/
Buttons  
E
until the distance from the  
main listening position to the center speaker is  
entered. Repeat the procedure for all active  
¤
speaker positions by pressing the Button  
E
to change  
‹ ›  
/
again and use the  
the setting.  
Buttons  
E
When the delay time for all speaker positions has  
been set you may return to the master menu by  
⁄ ¤  
pressing the  
/
Navigation Button  
E
until  
the © cursor is pointing to BACKTO  
MANUALSETUPand then pressing the Set  
Button . However, if you have a digital video  
F
Before beginning the output level adjustment  
process, make certain that all speaker connec-  
tions have been properly made. The system  
volume should be turned down at first.  
source or a digital video display that causes lack of  
lip sync you may use the A/V Sync adjust feature to  
delay the audio signal as it is sent to all channels  
(as opposed to the individual settings) so that the  
picture and sound are brought back together. We  
recommend that this adjustment be made using  
the direct access controls on the remote, as shown  
below. That enables you to see the image while  
making the adjustment; however, you may also  
adjust it here using the menu system.  
Manual output level adjustment is most easily  
done through the CHANNELADJUSTmenu  
(Figure 12). If you are already at the MANUAL  
¤
SETUPmenu, press the Button  
E
until  
the on-screen cursor is next to the CHAN-  
NELADJUSTline. If you are not at the main  
menu, press the OSD Button vto bring up the  
MASTERMENU(Figure 1), and then press  
¤
the Button  
screen cursor is next to the MANUAL  
E
four times so that the on-  
SETUPline. Press the Set Button  
the CHANNELADJUSTline and press the  
Set Button to bring the CHANNEL  
ADJUSTmenu (Figure 12) to the screen.  
F, select  
F
30 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Configuration  
After checking for speaker placement, let the test  
noise circulate again, and listen to see which  
channels sound louder than the others. Using the  
‹ ›  
source’s music starts to play. To exit this menu,  
* CHANNEL ADJUST *  
⁄ ¤  
press the  
/
buttons  
E
until the on-screen  
FL :  
CEN:  
FR :  
SR :  
0 dB  
0 dB  
0 dB  
0 dB  
SBR:  
SBL:  
SL :  
SUB:  
0 dB  
0 dB  
0 dB  
0 dB  
cursor is next to the BACKTOMANUAL  
front left speaker as a reference, press the  
/
SETUPline, and then press the Set Button  
TEST TONE  
: AUTO OFF MAN  
Buttons  
E
on the remote to bring all speakers  
F
to return to the MANUALSETUP.  
LEVEL RESET: OFF  
ON  
‹ ›  
to the same volume level. When one of the  
/
LEVEL TRIM: GLOBAL  
The output levels may also be adjusted at any  
time using the remote control and semi-OSD sys-  
tem. To adjust the output levels in this fashion,  
EZSET SETTINGS: OFF ON  
BACK TO MANUAL SETUP  
buttons is pushed, the test noise circulation will  
pause on the channel being adjusted to give you  
time to make the adjustment. When you release  
the button, the circulation will resume after five  
press the Test Button  
8. As soon as the  
Figure 12  
button is pressed, the test tone will begin to  
circulate as indicated earlier. The correct channel  
from which the test noise should be heard will be  
shown in the lower third of the video screen and  
seconds. The on-screen cursor and the test  
When the CHANNELADJUSTmenu first  
noise can also be moved directly to the speaker  
⁄ ¤  
appears, the test tone is off. Use the  
Navigation Button  
/
⁄ ¤  
/
to be adjusted by pressing the  
on the remote.  
buttons  
E
to select any channel  
E
for adjustment using an external source, such as  
a test disc, from which to judge the output levels.  
After the cursor is pointing to the channel to  
in the Main Information Display  
˜. While  
Continue to adjust the individual channels until  
the volume level sounds the same from each  
speaker. Note that adjustments should be made  
‹ ›  
the test noise is circulating, the proper channel  
position will also be indicated in the  
‹ ›  
be adjusted, press the / Navigation Button  
Speaker/Channel Input Indicators  
Ú
by a  
E
to raise or lower the output level. However,  
with the  
/
Buttons  
E
on the remote only,  
blinking letter within the correct channel. Turn up  
before proceeding with any manual adjustment  
we recommend that you first use the AVR’s inter-  
nal test tone generator and automatic sequencer  
to send a tone to each channel so that you may  
verify that all speaker connections have been  
properly made.  
NOT the main volume controls.  
the Volume  
d
until you can hear the test  
noise clearly.  
If you are using a sound-pressure level (SPL)  
meter for precise level adjustment with the test  
⁄ ¤  
/
To adjust the output level, press the  
but-  
tone, open the main Volume Control  
d
to -  
tons until the desired level is shown in the  
E
15dB and set the individual output level for each  
channel so that the meter reads 75dB, C-  
Weighted Slow. After all settings are made turn  
the main volume down.  
display or on screen. Once the buttons are  
released, the test noise will begin to circulate  
again in five seconds.  
To turn the test tone on and have it automatically  
circulate among the channels where a speaker  
has previously been configured (see page 27),  
⁄ ¤  
When all channels have the same output level,  
press the  
/
Navigation Button  
E
until  
You may also make these same adjustments with  
complete manual control over the channel being  
⁄ ¤  
turn the Volume  
d
down to about -40dB, oth-  
the cursor is pointing to the TESTTONE  
erwise the listening level may be too high as  
soon as the source’s music starts to play.  
‹ ›  
line on the menu. Next, press the  
Navigation Button  
/
adjusted by pressing the  
/
Navigation  
E
until AUTOis shown.  
Button  
E
until the cursor is pointing to the  
Afterwards press the Test Tone Selector  
button again to turn the test tone off and  
complete the process.  
8
This will cause the test tone to circulate, starting  
at the Front Left speaker. It will circulate clock-  
wise around the room, playing for two seconds in  
each speaker before switching to the next speak-  
er position. The cursor will blink next to the  
active speaker to indicate which speaker the  
sound should be coming from.  
TESTTONEline on the menu and then using  
‹ ›  
the / Navigation Button  
E
to select MAN  
in the highlighted video. In the MANmode, the  
test tone will also start immediately, but the tone  
will only be moved to another channel by pressing  
⁄ ¤  
IMPORTANT NOTE: The Output level adjust-  
ment made will be effective for all inputs, but  
only for the actual surround mode selected. To be  
effective for any other mode select that mode  
(with any input) and repeat the level adjustment  
described above. This will also allow you to com-  
pensate level differences between speakers, that  
may be different with each surround mode, or to  
increase or decrease the level of certain speakers  
intentionally, depending on the surround mode  
selected.  
the  
/
Navigation Button  
E. When the  
manual sequencing mode is active, the tone is  
⁄ ¤  
/
turned off by pressing the  
Navigation  
IMPORTANT NOTE: Because this test noise will  
have a much lower level than normal music, the  
volume must be lowered after the adjustment for  
all channels is made, but BEFORE you return to  
the main menu and the test tone turns off.  
Button  
E
until the cursor is pointing to the  
‹ ›  
TESTTONEline and the / Navigation  
Button  
E
is then pressed to select OFFin the  
highlighted video.  
The final option for tone adjustment using the  
menu system is to not use the internal test tone  
⁄ ¤  
NOTE: Remember to verify that the speakers  
have been properly connected. As the test noise  
circulates, listen to make certain that the sound  
comes from the speaker position shown in the  
at all. To do this, simply use the  
/
Note: Output level adjustment is not available  
for the Surround Off mode, as no surround speak-  
ers are used (so level differences between the  
speakers in the room cannot occur). But to com-  
pensate level differences between stereo and  
other surround modes (independently from the  
input selected) the outputs can be adjusted with  
the Level Trim Adjustment procedure, see page  
40, also for the Surround Off (Stereo) modes.  
Navigation Button  
E
⁄ ¤  
to change the channel  
Navigation Button  
to change the output level. When making  
and then use the  
/
Main Information Display  
˜. If the sound  
E
comes from a speaker location that does NOT  
match the position indicated in the display, turn  
the AVR off using the Main Power Switch  
and check the speaker wiring or connections to  
external power amplifiers to make certain that  
each speaker is connected to the correct output  
terminal.  
channel output adjustments without the internal  
test tone we strongly recommend that you use a  
test disc in the “repeat” mode on your DVD or  
CD player so that the signal being used is con-  
stant throughout the adjustment process.  
1
NOTE: The subwoofer output level is not  
adjustable using the test tone. To change the  
subwoofer level, follow the steps for Output Level  
Trim Adjustment on page 40.  
When all channels have an equal volume level,  
the adjustment is complete. Now turn the  
Volume  
d
down to about -40dB, otherwise  
the listening level may be too high as soon as the  
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Configuration  
In addition to the controls for selecting channels  
and the test tone operation, the settings on this  
menu also allow you to reset the level settings to  
either the factory default of 0dB or to re-establish  
the settings that were entered by running  
EzSet/EQ.  
When all changes to the Channel Output levels  
and the associated level trim settings have been  
⁄ ¤  
made press the  
/
Navigation Button  
E
until the cursor is on the BACKTOMANUAL  
SETUPmenu and then pressing the Set  
Button  
F
so that you may make any other  
adjustments to the system parameters. If the  
changes just made complete the manual adjust-  
⁄ ¤  
/
so that the cursor is  
To reset all channel levels to 0dB press  
Navigation Button  
E
ments needed, press the OSD Button  
L
to  
pointing to the LEVELRESETline and then  
exit the menu system and resume normal system  
operation.  
⁄ ¤  
/
press the  
Navigation Button  
E
once  
so ONappears in highlighted video.  
Additional Input Adjustments  
To return to the settings established by EzSet/EQ,  
even if you have made manual changes to the  
output trims using the steps shown above, press  
⁄ ¤  
After one input has been adjusted for Surround  
mode, digital input (if any), speaker type, and  
output levels, go back to the IN/OUT  
SETUPline on the MASTERMENU(Figure  
1) and enter the settings for each input that you  
will use. In most cases, only the digital input and  
surround mode will be different from one input to  
the next, while the speaker type, crossover fre-  
quency, Night mode and output level settings will  
usually be the same and may be quickly entered  
by entering the same data used for the original  
input.  
/
Navigation Button  
E
so that the cur-  
sor is pointing to the EZSETSETTINGS  
⁄ ¤  
line and then press the  
Button  
/
Navigation  
E
once so ON appears in highlighted  
video. Remember that after turning the EzSet/EQ  
settings back on you must turn return to this  
menu line and change the setting to OFF if you  
wish to make any manual trim adjustments.  
The final setting in this menu enables you to have  
the output levels remain the same for all inputs  
or to be adjusted differently for each (or any)  
input. While most listeners prefer to keep the  
same output levels for all sources, you may wish  
to raise or lower some channels, particularly the  
subwoofer output for a specific source such as a  
CD that is primarily used for music playback.  
Once the settings outlined on the previous pages  
have been made, the AVR is ready for operation.  
While there are some additional settings to be  
made, these are best done after you have had an  
opportunity to listen to a variety of sources and  
different kinds of program material. These  
advanced settings are described on pages 41 to  
42 of this manual. In addition, any of the settings  
made in the initial configuration of the unit may  
be changed at any time. As you add new or dif-  
ferent sources or speakers, or if you wish to  
change a setting to better reflect your listening  
taste, simply follow the instructions for changing  
the settings for that parameter as shown in this  
section.  
To enter individual settings for a specific channel,  
first make sure that you have either run EzSet/EQ  
and/or made any desired manual trim adjust-  
ments to set a baseline for all channels. After that  
is done, press the OSD Button  
L
to exit the  
menu system and then select the input for which  
you wish to enter different level settings by using  
either the Input Source Selectors  
%
on the  
front panel or the buttons on the remote that are  
used to select an input source  
467ç∂. Next, return to the  
CHANNELOUTPUTsubmenu using the  
steps outlined above.  
Note that any settings changed at any time, also  
when the discrete buttons are used only, will be  
stored in memory in the AVR, also if it´s turned off  
completely, unless it will be reset (see page 56).  
Having completed the setup and configuration  
process for your AVR, you are about to experience  
the finest in music and home-theater listening.  
Enjoy!  
At the CHANNELOUTPUTmenu press  
⁄ ¤  
/
Navigation Button  
E
until the cursor  
is pointing to the LEVELTRIMline and then  
⁄ ¤  
/
press the  
Navigation Button  
E
once  
so that INDEPENDENTappears in high-  
lighted video. When this setting is active you may  
change the channel output levels for any input  
without changing the settings previously estab-  
lished for another.  
32 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operation  
Surround Mode Chart  
MODE  
FEATURES  
DELAY TIME RANGE  
DOLBY DIGITAL  
Available only with digital input sources encoded with Dolby Digital data. It provides  
up to five separate main audio channels and a special dedicated Low Frequency Effects  
channel.  
Center: 0 - 30ft / 9m  
Initial Setting: 12ft / 3.6m  
Surround: 0 - 30ft / 9m  
Initial Setting: 10ft / 3m  
DOLBY DIGITAL EX  
Available when the receiver is configured for 6.1/7.1 channel operation, Dolby Digital EX is the  
latest version of Dolby Digital. When used with movies or other programs that have special  
encoding, Dolby Digital EX reproduces specially encoded soundtracks so that a full 6.1/7.1  
soundfield is available. When the receiver is set for 6.1/7.1 operation and a Dolby Digital signal is  
present, the EX mode is automatically selected. Even if specific EX encoding is not available to  
provide the additional channel, the special algorithms will derive a 6.1/7.1 output.  
Center: 0 - 30ft / 9m  
Initial Setting: 12ft / 3.6m  
Surround: 0 - 30ft / 9m  
Initial Setting: 10ft / 3m  
Surround Back: 0 - 30ft / 9m  
Initial Setting: 10ft / 3m  
DTS 5.1  
When the speaker configuration is set for 5.1-channel operation, the DTS 5.1 mode is  
available when DVD, audio-only music or laserdiscs encoded with DTS data are played.  
DTS 5.1 provides up to five separate main audio channels and a special dedicated  
low-frequency channel.  
Delay time not adjustable  
DTS-ES 6.1 Matrix  
When the speaker configuration is set for 6.1/7.1 operation, playback of a DTS-encoded program  
Delay time not adjustable  
DTS-ES 6.1 Discrete source will automatically trigger the selection of one of the two DTS-ES modes. Newer discs with  
special DTS-ES discrete encoding will be decoded to provide six discrete, full-bandwidth channels  
plus a separate low-frequency channel. All other DTS discs will be decoded using the DTS-ES Matrix  
mode, which creates a 6.1-channel sound field from the original 5.1-channel soundtrack.  
DOLBY PRO LOGIC II Dolby Pro Logic II is the latest version of Dolby Laboratory’s benchmark surround technology  
Center: 0 - 30ft / 9m  
MOVIE  
MUSIC  
PRO LOGIC  
that decodes full-range, discrete left, center right, right surround and left surround channels  
from matrix surround encoded programs and conventional stereo sources when  
an analog input or a digital input with PCM or Dolby Digital 2.0 recordings is in use. The  
Dolby Pro Logic II Movie mode is optimized for movie soundtracks that are recorded with matrix  
surround, by creating separate center, rear left and rear right signals. while the Pro Logic II Music  
mode should be used with musical selections that are recorded with matrix surround or even with  
normal stereo mode, creating separate rear left and rear right signals  
Initial Setting: 12ft / 3.6m  
Surround: 0 - 30ft / 9m  
Initial Setting: 10ft / 3m  
in any case. The Pro Logic mode creates compelling five-channel surround sound from  
conventional stereo recordings.  
DOLBY PRO LOGIC IIx Dolby Pro Logic IIx is the latest extension of Dolby Pro Logic II technology that creates a discrete  
Center: 0 - 30ft / 9m  
MUSIC  
MOVIE  
6.1 and 7.1 sound field from matrix surround or two-channel stereo sources in systems  
configured for surround back speakers. Both Movie and Music versions of Pro Logic IIx are  
available. These modes may also be applied to a six-channel source connected to the  
Initial Setting: 12ft / 3.6m  
Surround: 0 - 30ft / 9m  
Initial Setting: 10ft / 3m  
8-Channel Direct Inputs  
9
so that the sound field is enhanced by adding back surround  
channels.  
Logic 7 Cinema  
Logic 7 Music  
Logic 7 Enhance  
Exclusive to Harman Kardon for AV receivers, Logic 7 is an advanced mode that extracts the  
maximum surround information from either surround-encoded programs or conventional stereo  
material. Depending on the number of speakers in use and the selection made in the SURROUND  
SELECTmenu, the “5.1” versions of Logic 7 modes are available when the 5.1 option is chosen,  
while the “7.1” versions of Logic 7 produce a full sound field presentation, including back surround  
speakers when the “6.1/7.1” option is chosen. The Logic 7 C (or Cinema) mode should be used  
with any source that contains Dolby Surround or similar matrix encoding. Logic 7 C delivers  
increased center-channel intelligibility, and more accurate placement of sounds with fades and pans  
that are much smoother and more realistic than with former decoding techniques. The Logic 7 M or  
Music mode should be used with analog or PCM stereo sources. Logic 7 M enhances the listening  
experience by presenting a wider front soundstage and greater rear ambience. Both Logic 7 modes  
also direct low-frequency information to the subwoofer (if installed and configured) to deliver  
maximum bass impact. The Logic 7 E (or Enhance) mode is an extension of the Logic 7 modes that is  
primarily used with musical programs and is available with the 5.1 surround mode option selected  
only. Logic 7 E adds additional bass enhancement that circulates low frequencies in the 40Hz to 120Hz  
range to the front and surround speakers to deliver a less localized soundstage that appears broader  
and wider than when the subwoofer is the sole source of bass energy.  
Delay time not adjustable  
OPERATION 33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operation  
Surround Mode Chart  
MODE  
FEATURES  
DELAY TIME RANGE  
DTS Neo:6 Cinema  
DTS Neo:6 Music  
These two modes are available when any analog source is playing to create a six-channel  
surround presentation from conventional Matrix-encoded and traditional Stereo sources. Select  
the Cinema version of Neo:6 when a program with any type of analog Matrix surround encoding  
is present. Select the Music version of Neo:6 for optimal processing when a nonencoded,  
two-channel stereo program is being played.  
Delay time not adjustable  
DOLBY 3 STEREO  
Uses the information contained in a surround-encoded or two-channel stereo program to  
create center-channel information. In addition, the information that is normally sent to the  
rear-channel surround speakers is carefully mixed in with the front-left and front-right  
channels for increased realism. Use this mode when you have a center-channel speaker  
but no surround speakers.  
No surround channels  
THEATER  
The THEATER mode creates a sound field that resembles the acoustic feeling of a  
standard live performance theater, with stereo and even pure mono sources.  
Delay time not adjustable  
Delay time not adjustable  
No surround channels  
HALL 1  
HALL 2  
The two Hall modes create sound fields that resemble a small (HALL1) or  
medium sized (HALL 2) concert hall, with stereo and even pure mono sources.  
Dolby Virtual Speaker Dolby Virtual Speaker technology uses a next-generation advanced algorithm to reproduce the  
Reference  
Wide  
dynamics and surround sound effects of a precisely placed 5.1-channel speaker system using only  
front left and right speakers. In the Reference Mode, the apparent width of the sound across  
the front image is defined by the distance between the two speakers. The Wide Mode  
provides a wider, more spacious front image when the two speakers areclose together.  
5-Channel Stereo  
7-Channel Stereo  
This mode takes advantage of multiple speakers to place a stereo signal at both the front and  
back of a room. Depending on whether the AVR has been configured for either 5.1 or 6.1/7.1  
operation, one of these modes, but not both, is available at any time. Ideal for playing music in  
situations such as a party, this mode places the same signal at the front-left and surround-left,  
and at the front-right and surround-right speakers. The center channel is fed a summed mono  
mix of the in-phase material of the left and right channels.  
No delay available in  
these modes  
SURROUND  
OFF (STEREO)  
This mode turns off all surround processing and presents the pure left- and right-  
channel presentation of two-channel stereo programs.  
No surround channels  
No surround channels  
Dolby Headphone  
Dolby Headphone enables ordinary stereo headphones to portray the sound of a five-speaker  
surround-playback system. The DH1 mode creates headphone presentation that resembles a small,  
well-damped room and is appropriate for use with both movies and music-only recordings.  
The DH2 mode creates a more acoustically live room particularly suited to music listening.  
The DH3 mode creates a larger room, more like a concert hall or movie theater.  
DH1  
DH2  
DH3  
34 OPERATION  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operation  
When the programmed sleep time has elapsed,  
the unit will automatically turn off (to Standby  
mode). Note that the front panel display will dim  
to one half brightness when the Sleep function is  
programmed. To cancel the Sleep function, press  
able on a TV monitor connected to the AVR. If a  
component video source is connected to the DVD  
Basic Operation  
Once you have completed the setup and configu-  
ration of the AVR, it is simple to operate and  
enjoy. The following instructions should be fol-  
lowed for you to maximize your enjoyment of  
your new receiver:  
g
or Video 1 or 2 JLComponent Inputs,  
it will be routed to the Component Video  
Outputs . Make certain that your TV is set to  
K
and hold the Sleep Button  
9
until the infor-  
the proper input to view the appropriate video  
signal (composite, S-Video or component video,  
see Notes for S-Video on page 16).  
mation display returns to normal brightness and  
the Sleep indicator numbers disappear and the  
words SLEEPOFFappear in the Main  
Turning the AVR On or Off  
• When using the AVR for the first time, you must  
press the Main Power Switch  
panel to turn the unit on. This places the unit in a  
Standby mode, as indicated by the amber color of  
Information Display  
˜.  
1
on the front  
6-Channel/8-Channel Direct Input  
Source Selection  
• There are two input choices available for use  
with sources such as a DVD-Audio or SACD play-  
er that are connected to the 8-Channel Direct  
the Power Indicator  
Standby, you may begin a listening session by  
pressing the System Power Control or the  
on the front panel or the  
3. Once the unit is in  
• To select a source, press any of the Source  
Selector buttons on the remote 467  
Inputs  
9. Select the appropriate input accord-  
2
ç∂  
.
ing to the way your system and source equip-  
ment is configured:  
Source button  
%
NOTE: After pressing one of the Input Selector  
buttons to turn the unit on, press the  
AVR Selector to have the remote  
AVR Selector  
5. Note that the Power  
4
Indicator  
3
will turn blue. This will turn the unit  
• The 6CHDIRECTinput should be used  
when the SBR and SBL inputs are NOT in use and  
the input source device has its own internal bass  
management system. This input passes the input  
from the source directly through to the volume  
control without any analog to digital conversion  
and it mutes the unused input jacks to prevent  
unwanted noise from interfering with system per-  
formance.  
5
on and return it to the input source that was last  
used. The unit may also be turned on from Standby  
by pressing any of the Source Selector buttons  
on the remote 4567∫çor the  
control the AVR functions.  
• The input source may also be changed by  
pressing the front-panel Input Source Selector  
Source button  
%
on the front panel.  
button  
%. Each press of the button will move  
the input selection through the list of available  
inputs.  
NOTE: After pressing one of the Input Selector  
buttons to turn the unit on, press the  
4∂  
AVR Selector to have the remote  
5
• As the input is changed, the AVR will automati-  
cally switch to the digital input (if selected), sur-  
round mode component video input, A/V Sync  
Delay and Night Mode configurations that were  
in effect the last time that input was used. If the  
LEVELTRIMline on the CHANNEL  
ADJUSTmenu (Fig. 12) was set to INDE-  
PENDENT, as shown on page 31, the settings  
for channel output levels will also change to the  
preset values.  
control the AVR functions.  
• The 8CHDIRECTINPUTshould be  
used when an input is connected to all eight  
To turn the unit off at the end of a listening ses-  
sion, simply press the System Power Control  
8-Channel Direct Inputs  
9
and when the  
input source device has its own internal bass  
management system. This input passes the input  
from the source directly through to the volume  
control without any analog to digital conversion.  
2
on the front panel or the Power Off Button  
on the remote. Power will be shut off to  
any equipment plugged into the rear panel  
Switched AC Outlets and the Power  
Indicator will turn orange.  
3
å
G
Note that when the 6-Channel or 8-Channel  
Input is in use, you may not select a surround  
mode, as the external decoder determines the  
processing in use. In addition, there is no signal  
at the record outputs or bass management when  
the 6-Channel or 8-Channel Direct Input is in use  
and the tone or balance controls will not  
function.  
3
When the remote is used to turn the unit “off” it  
is actually placing the system in a Standby mode,  
as indicated by the orange color of the Power  
• The front-panel Video 4 Inputs  
Digital 4 Input or the Coaxial Digital 4  
Input may be used to connect a device such  
Ô, Optical  
*
Ó
Indicator  
3.  
as a video game or camcorder to your home  
entertainment system on a temporary basis.  
When they are configured as outputs (see page  
39) you can also connect an audio or video  
recorder (composite or S-Video) for recording the  
source selected.  
When you will be away from home for an  
extended period of time it is always a good idea  
to completely turn the unit off with the front  
Controls and Use of Headphones  
panel Main Power Switch  
1.  
• Adjust the volume to a comfortable level using  
NOTE: All preset memories may be lost if the  
unit is left turned off with the Main Power  
the front panel Volume Control  
ı
or remote  
• As the input source is changed, the new input  
name will appear momentarily as an on-screen  
display in the lower third of the video display. The  
input name will also appear in the Main  
Volume Up/Down dîbuttons.  
Switch  
1
for more than two weeks.  
• To temporarily silence all speaker outputs press  
the Mute button K. This will interrupt the  
Using the Sleep Timer  
• To program the AVR for automatic turn-off,  
press the Sleep Button  
press of the button will increase the time before  
shut down in the following sequence:  
g
output to all speakers and the headphone jack,  
but it will not affect any recording or dubbing  
that may be in progress. When the system is  
muted, the word MUTEwill blink in the Main  
Information Display  
˜.  
9
on the remote. Each  
• When a pure audio input (CD, Tuner, Tape, 6/8  
Channel Input) is selected, the last video input  
used remains routed to the Video Outputs  
PR(except from its own Video 1/ source) and  
90  
min  
80  
min  
70  
min  
60  
min  
50  
min  
Information Display  
button K again to return to normal  
operation.  
˜. Press the Mute  
g
40  
min  
30  
min  
20  
min  
10  
min  
OFF  
Video Monitor Output  
B. This permits  
simultaneous viewing and listening to different  
sources.  
• During a listening session you may wish to  
adjust the Bass Control and Treble Control to  
suit your listening tastes or room acoustics. Note  
that these controls (and Balance) will not func-  
tion when the 6/8 channel direct input is in use.  
The sleep time will be displayed in the Lower  
Display Line and it will count down until  
the time has elapsed.  
˜
• When a Video source is selected, its audio  
signal will be fed to the speakers and the video  
signal for that input will be routed to the appro-  
priate Monitor Output Jack  
B
and will be view-  
OPERATION 35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operation  
• To set the output of the AVR so that the output  
is “flat,” with the tone and balance controls de-  
When no rear speakers are in use, the Dolby 3  
Stereo mode should be selected with all surround  
recordings.  
will show the current mode from that group if it is  
already in use, or the first available mode if you  
are currently using another mode. To cycle  
activated, press the Tone Mode button  
8
once or twice so that the words ToneOut  
appear momentarily in the Main Information  
through the available modes in that group press  
the button again until the desired mode appears  
Note that when Dolby Digital 2.0 signals (e.g.  
"D.D. 2.0" tracks from DVD), that are encoded  
with Dolby Pro Logic information, are received via  
any digital input, the Dolby Pro Logic II Movie  
mode will be selected automatically (in addition  
to the Dolby Digital mode) and will decode a full  
range 5.1 channel surround sound even from  
those recordings (see also "Dolby Digital" on  
page 36).  
Display  
˜. To return the tone controls to an  
in the Lower Display Line  
˜
and the on-  
active condition, press the Tone Mode  
8
but-  
screen display.  
ton once or twice so that the words ToneIn  
momentarily appear in the Main Information  
To select from the DSP modes (Hall 1, Hall 2,  
Theater) press the Surround Mode Selector  
Display  
˜.  
A
repeatedly to scroll through the list of avail-  
• When the tone controls are active, the amount  
of bass and treble boost/cut may be adjusted by  
first pressing the Tone Mode Button on the  
able modes.  
Note that the Dolby Digital or DTS modes may  
only be selected when a digital input is in use. In  
addition, when a digital source is present, the AVR  
will automatically select and switch to the correct  
mode (Dolby Digital or DTS), regardless of the  
mode that has been previously selected. For more  
information on selecting digital sources, see the fol-  
lowing section of this manual.  
To create wide, enveloping sound field environ-  
ments and defined pans and flyovers with all ana-  
log stereo recordings select the Dolby Pro Logic II  
Music or Emulation mode or Harman Kardon’s  
exclusive Logic 7 Music mode for a dramatic  
improvement in comparison to the Dolby Pro  
Logic (I) mode of former times.  
front panel  
8
or the remote  
two or three  
times until the desired setting (BASSMODEor  
TREBLEMODE) appears in the on-screen dis-  
play and the Lower Display Line  
˜
on the  
. Next, use  
⁄ ¤  
the  
/
Navigation Button  
E
‹ ›  
remote or the  
/
Button on the front panel  
7$to change the setting as desired. The unit  
will return to normal operation within five sec-  
onds after the setting is changed.  
NOTE: Once a program has been encoded with  
matrix surround information, it retains the surround  
information as long as the program is broadcast in  
stereo. Thus, movies with surround sound may be  
decoded via any of the analog surround modes  
such as Pro Logic II Cinema, Logic 7 Cinema or DTS  
Neo:6 Cinema, when they are broadcast via con-  
ventional TV stations, cable,  
pay-TV and satellite transmission. In addition, a  
growing number of made-for-television programs,  
sports broadcasts, radio dramas and music CDs are  
also recorded in surround sound. You may view a  
list of these programs at the Dolby Laboratories  
When the 6-Channel/8-Channel direct inputs are  
in use there is no surround processing, as these  
inputs take the analog output signals from an  
optional, external DVD-Audio or SACD player, or  
another source device and carry them straight  
through to the volume control.  
• For private listening, plug the 6.3 mm stereo  
phone plug from a pair of stereo headphones into  
the front panel Headphone Jack  
4.  
Note that when the headphone’s plug is connect-  
ed, the speakers will automatically mute and a  
two-channel stereo signal will be sent to the  
To listen to a program in traditional two-channel  
stereo, using the front left and front right  
speakers only (plus the subwoofer, if installed and  
headphones. The Lower Display Line  
˜
will  
read DOLBYH: BP, indicating that the head-  
phone output is in the Bypass mode, and to con-  
firm that no processing is being used.  
configured), press the Stereo Button  
5S  
until SURROFFappears in the Main  
Information Display ˜.  
• When the headphones are in use, you may take  
advantage of the Dolby Headphone modes to  
bring added spaciousness to headphone listening.  
Digital Audio Playback  
Even when a program is not listed as carrying  
intentional surround information, you may find that  
the Dolby Pro Logic II, Dolby Pro Logic IIx,  
DTS NEO:6 Music or Logic 7 Music or Enhanced  
modes often deliver enveloping surround presenta-  
tions through the use of the natural surround infor-  
mation present in all stereo recordings.  
Digital audio is a major advancement over older  
analog surround processing systems such as  
Dolby Pro Logic. It delivers five or six discrete  
channels: left front, center, right front, left  
surround and right surround and with DTS ES (see  
below) even surround back (with identical signals  
for left and right). Each channel reproduces full  
frequency range (20Hz to 20kHz) and offers  
dramatically improved dynamic range and  
significant improvements to signal-to-noise ratios.  
In addition, digital systems have the capability to  
deliver an additional channel that is specifically  
devoted to low-frequency information. This is the  
“.1” channel referred to when you see these  
systems described as “5.1,” “6.1” or “7.1”. The  
bass channel is separate from the other channels,  
but since it is intentionally bandwidth-limited,  
sound designers have given it that unique  
designation.  
Press the Dolby Mode Select Button  
the Surround Mode Group Selector  
M
5
or  
to  
cycle through the three Dolby Headphone modes  
to select the one that you prefer.  
Surround Mode Selection  
One of the most important features of the  
AVR is its ability to reproduce a full multichannel  
surround sound field from digital sources, analog  
matrix surround encoded programs and standard  
stereo or even mono programs.  
However, for stereo programs without any surround  
information the Theater, Hall and 5/7CH Stereo  
modes should be tried (effective particularly with  
old ”extreme” stereo recordings) and for mono  
programs, we suggest that you try the Theater or  
Hall modes.  
Selection of a surround mode is based on personal  
taste, as well as the type of program source materi-  
al being used. For example, CDs, motion pictures or  
TV programs bearing the logo of one of the major  
surround-encoding processes, such as Dolby  
Surround should be played in either the Dolby Pro  
Logic II Movie (with movies) or Music (with music)  
surround mode, with any DTS NEO:6 mode or  
with Harman Kardon´s exclusive Logic 7 Movie  
Mode, to create a full range 5.1 channel or (with  
Logic 7 and DTS NEO:6) even 7.1 channel sur-  
round signal from surround encoded programs,  
with a stereophonic left and right rear signal, just  
as it was recorded (e.g. sound being recorded  
from left rear side will be heard from that side  
only, for more details see chart on page 33).  
Surround modes are selected using either the  
front panel controls or the remote. To select a new  
surround mode from the front panel, first press  
the Surround Mode Group Selector Button  
5
until the desired major surround mode group  
such as Dolby, DTS or Logic 7 is selected. Next,  
press the Surround Mode Selector Button  
9
Dolby Digital  
Dolby Digital (originally known as AC-3®) is a  
standard part of DVD, and is available on specially  
encoded LD discs and satellite broadcasts and it is  
a part of the new high-definition television  
(HDTV) system.  
to choose the specific individual surround mode.  
To select a surround mode using the remote con-  
trol, press the button for the major surround  
mode group that includes the mode you wish to  
choose from: Dolby  
DTS Neo:6 , Logic 7  
DSP Surround . The first press of the button  
M
, DTS Surround  
N,  
Note that an optional, external RF demodulator is  
required to use the AVR to listen to the Dolby  
T
O
, Stereo  
S
or  
A
36 OPERATION  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operation  
Digital sound tracks available on laser discs.  
Connect the RF output of the LD player to the  
demodulator and then connect the digital output  
of the demodulator to the Optical or Coaxial  
inputs UV*Óof the AVR. No demodulator  
is required for use with DVD players or DTS-  
encoded laser discs.  
In order to listen to DVDs encoded with DTS  
sound tracks, the DVD player must be compatible  
with the DTS signal as indicated by a DTS logo on  
the player’s front panel. Note that early DVD  
players may not be able to play DTS- encoded  
DVDs. This does not indicate a problem with the  
AVR, as some players cannot pass the DTS signal  
through to the digital outputs. If you are in doubt  
as to the capability of your DVD player to handle  
DTS DVDs, consult the player’s owner’s manual.  
as the Surround mode to enjoy the benefits of the  
HDCD process.  
HDCD  
HDCD, which stands for High Definition Com-  
patible Digital®, is a sophisticated process that  
enables the AVR to deliver outstanding digital-to-  
analog decoding of PCM signals from any DVD or  
CD player, connected to a digital input on the  
AVR even when normal, non-HDCD-compatible  
players are used (only a digital output is needed).  
In order to provide maximum playback compati-  
bility with DVDs, the AVR 635 receiver will always  
default first to the playback mode embedded in a  
disc’s digital “flag” information. For Dolby Digital  
discs, the following playback modes are initially  
selected after the AVR locks to the incoming digi-  
tal audio data stream to identify the selected:  
Please note that some DVD players are shipped  
with their output set for Dolby Digital only. To  
insure that DTS data is being sent to the AVR,  
please check the setup menu system on your  
DVD player to make certain that DTS data output  
is enabled.  
When a CD with the HDCD recording is played,  
the AVR is able to take advantage of the special  
recording process that is used in the creation of  
HDCD disc. The special circuitry enables audio  
with extraordinary fidelity, stunning resolution  
and the highest possible overall quality.  
• When a 5.1 audio stream is detected, the Dolby  
Digital 5.1 format will be selected, regardless  
of the number of speakers in your system, in  
compliance with Dolby Laboratories licensing  
requirements.  
PCM Audio Playback  
PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) is the non- com-  
pressed digital audio system used for compact  
discs, Non-Dolby Digital/DTS Laserdiscs and some  
special PCM encoded DVDs. The digital circuits in  
the AVR are capable of high quality digital-to-ana-  
log decoding, and they may be connected directly  
to the digital audio output of your CD/DVD or LD  
player (LD only for PCM or DTS programs, for  
Dolby Digital laser discs an RF adapter is needed,  
see ”Dolby Digital” above).  
As long as a digital input and the pure Stereo  
mode (Surround Off) are selected, the AVR will  
automatically sense that it is an HDCD recording.  
• When a disc with the Dolby Digital EX format  
flag is played, your system will automatically  
switch to the EX mode when seven main chan-  
nel speakers are available.  
It is important to note that the HDCD process is  
completely compatible with standard recordings.  
Indeed, the high-quality digital-to-analog  
circuitry that is part of HDCD and the HDCD  
decoder chip, replacing the monolithic digital  
filters used in conventional DACs, will enable  
enhanced performance also with normal,  
non-HDCD encoded program material.  
• When a disc with Dolby Digital data, but only  
2.0 audio is detected, the default mode is  
Dolby Digital with Pro Logic II post-processing  
when you have a 5.1 speaker system, or Dolby  
Digital with Pro Logic IIx post-processing when  
you have a 7.1 speaker system.  
Connections may be made to either the Optical  
or Coaxial inputs UV on the rear panel or the  
MP3 Audio Playback  
front panel Digital Inputs *Ó  
.
The AVR is one of the few A/V receivers to pro-  
vide on-board decoding for the MP3 audio for-  
mat used on specific computer audio files and by  
portable MP3 players/recorders. In addition, some  
new CD and DVD players are capable of playing  
back optical discs that are recorded with MP3,  
rather than standard CD audio information. By  
offering MP3 decoding, the AVR is able to deliver  
more precise conversion of the digital signals to  
an analog output, along with the  
benefits of listening to MP3 audio through the  
AVR’s high current amplifier and the speakers  
from your surround system, rather than the small-  
er speakers and low powered amplifiers typically  
used with computers.  
• Depending on the number of speaker channels  
available in your system, once the AVR locks to  
the digital signal, you may select any surround  
mode or post-processing option that is avail-  
able, based on the incoming data stream’s pos-  
sible restrictions and the number of speakers in  
your system. For example, when a 5.1 or 2.0  
audio stream is in use, you may select alternate  
postprocessing such as Logic 7/7-Channel  
Movie Mode post-processing to create the rear  
surrounds in 7.1 speaker systems.  
To listen to a PCM digital source, first select the  
input for the desired source (e.g., CD) to feed its  
video signal (if any) to the TV monitor and to pro-  
vide its analog audio signal for recording. Next  
press the Digital Select button  
Û
G
and then  
⁄ ¤  
use the  
/
buttons  
E
on the remote, or the  
Selector buttons7$on the front panel, until  
the desired choice appears in the Lower Display  
Line  
˜, then press the Set button  
@
F
to  
confirm the choice.  
In most cases this will be 48KHZ, though in  
the case of specially mastered, high-resolution  
audio discs you will see a 96KHZindication.  
DTS  
DTS is another digital audio system that is capa-  
ble of delivering 5.1, 6.1 or 7.1 audio. Although  
both DTS and Dolby Digital are digital, they use  
different methods of encoding the signals, and  
thus they require different decoding circuits to  
convert the digital signals back to analog.  
The PCM48KHZindication will also appear  
when modes or inputs are changed for analog  
sources. In those cases the system is telling you  
the sampling frequency used internally at the  
output of the analog-to-digital converters that  
change the incoming signal from a VCR, tape  
deck, the tuner, or other ana-log source to digital.  
To take advantage of the AVR’s MP3 capabilities,  
simply connect the digital (SPDIF) output of a  
computer sound card able to feed the MP3 for-  
mat to its digital output, or the digital (SPDIF)  
output of MP3 compatible CD or DVD players or  
of a portable MP3 player with a digital output to  
either the rear panel Digital Inputs UV or  
DTS-encoded sound tracks are available on select  
DVD and LD discs, as well as on special audio-  
only DTS CDs. You may use any LD, DVD or CD  
player equipped with a digital output to play  
DTS-encoded special audio-only CDs with the  
AVR, but DTS-LDs can be played on LD players  
and DTS-DVDs on DVD players only. All that is  
required is to connect the player’s digital output  
to either the Optical or Coaxial input on the  
During PCM playback the unit automatically will  
turn to the default surround mode or to the  
LOGIC7mode but you also may select any  
surround mode except Dolby Digital or DTS.  
When an HDCD encoded disc is being played (see  
below) and the CD player is connected to the  
AVR via a digital connection, select Surround Off  
the front panel Digital Inputs *Ó  
.
NOTES:  
• The AVR is only capable of playing signals in  
the MP3 (MPEG 1/Layer 3) format. It is not com-  
patible with other computer audio codecs.  
rear panel UVor front panel *Ó  
.
, HDCD®, High Definition Compatible Digital® and Pacific Microsonicsare either registered trademarks or trademarks of Pacific Microsonics, Inc., in the United  
States and/or other countries. HDCD System manufactured under license from Pacific Microsonics, Inc.  
OPERATION 37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operation  
• The MP 3 DSP mode found in the new AVR  
requires an MP3 SPDIF stream. Presently, only a  
few units provide this but in the coming genera-  
tions of motherboards and operating system  
updates this will follow, since SPDIF is the stan-  
dard for audio & video hardware.  
Digital Bitstream Indicators  
The last number indicates if there is a discrete  
Low Frequency Effects (LFE) channel. This is the  
“.1” in the common abbreviation of “5.1” sound  
and it is a special channel that contains only bass  
frequencies.  
When a digital source is playing, the AVR senses  
the type of bitstream data that is present. Using  
this information, the correct surround mode will  
automatically be selected. For example, DTS bit-  
streams will cause the unit to switch to DTS  
decoding, and Dolby Digital bitstreams will enable  
Dolby Digital decoding. When the unit senses PCM  
data, from CDs and LDs and some music DVDs or  
certain tracks on normal DVDs, it will allow the  
appropriate surround mode to be selected manu-  
ally. Since the range of available surround modes  
depends on the type of digital data that is present,  
the AVR uses a variety of indicators to let you  
know what type of signal is present. This will help  
you to understand the choice of modes and the  
input channels recorded on the disc.  
• A .1 tells you that an LFE channel is present.  
This will be displayed for Dolby Digital 5.1 and  
DTS 5.1 programs, as available.  
• The digital audio input signal may be either  
optical or coaxial, but the signal must be in the  
MP3 SPDIF format. Direct connection of USB or  
serial data outputs is not possible, even though  
the signals are in the MP3 format. If you have any  
questions about the data output format from your  
computer or a sound card, check with the device’s  
Owner’s Manual or contact the manufacturer’s  
technical support area.  
• A 0 indicates that there is no LFE channel infor-  
mation available. However, even when there is  
no dedicated LFE channel, low frequency sound  
will be present at the subwoofer output when  
the speaker configuration is set to show the  
presence of subwoofer.  
• The information in the right side of the display  
will tell you if the digital audio data contains a  
special flag signal that will automatically acti-  
vate the appropriate 6.1 or 7.1 mode. This will  
be shown as EX-ON or EX-OFF for Dolby Digital  
bitstreams and ES-ON or ES-OFF for DTS bit-  
streams.  
• If your computer or sound card’s digital output  
is not capable of direct connection to the AVR or  
if the output is not capable of delivering MP3  
data stream, you may use an optional, external  
transcoder, such as those available from Harman  
Kardon to convert the USB output of a computer  
to a format compatible with the AVR. Contact  
your Harman Kardon dealer for additional details.  
When a digital source is playing, the AVR will  
display a variety of messages to indicate the type  
of bitstream received. These messages will appear  
shortly after an input or surround mode is  
changed, and will remain in the Main Infor-  
When Dolby Digital 3/2/.1 or DTS 3/2/.1 signals  
are being played, the AVR will automatically  
switch to the proper surround mode, and no other  
processing may be selected. When a Dolby Digital  
signal with a 3/1/0 or 2/0/0 signal is detected you  
may select any of the Dolby surround modes.  
mation Display  
˜
for about five seconds  
Selecting a Digital Source  
before the display returns to the normal surround  
mode indication.  
To utilize either digital mode you must have  
properly connected a digital source to the AVR.  
Connect the digital outputs from DVD players,  
HDTV receivers, satellite systems or CD players to  
the Optical or Coaxial inputs on the rear or  
front panel UV. In order to provide a  
backup signal and a source for analog stereo  
recording, the analog outputs provided on digital  
source equipment should also be connected to  
their appropriate inputs on the AVR rear panel  
(e.g., connect the analog stereo audio output  
For Dolby Digital and DTS sources, a three digit  
indication will appear, showing the number of  
channels present in the data. An example of this  
type of display is 3/2/.1.  
It is always a good idea to check the readout for  
the channel data to make certain that it matches  
the audio logo information shown on the back of  
a DVD package. In some cases you will see indica-  
tion for “2/0/0” even when the disc contains a  
full 5.1, or 3/2/.1 signal. When this happens,  
check the audio output settings for your DVD  
player or the audio menu selections for the specif-  
ic disc being played to make certain that the play-  
er is sending the correct signal to the AVR.  
The first number indicates how many discrete  
front channel signals are present.  
• A 3 tells you that separate front left, center and  
front right signals are available. This will be dis-  
played for Dolby Digital 5.1 and DTS 5.1 pro-  
grams.  
from a DVD to the DVD Audio inputs  
5
on the  
rear panel when you connect the source’s digital  
outputs).  
• A 2 tells you that separate front left and right  
signals are available, but there is no discrete  
center channel signal. This will be displayed for  
Dolby Digital bit streams that have stereo pro-  
gram material.  
To select a digital source such as DVD, first select  
its input using the remote or front panel Input  
Speaker/Channel Indicators  
Selector  
4
%
as outlined in this manual in  
In addition to the Bitstream Indicators, the  
AVR features a set of unique channel-input indi-  
cators that tell you how many channels of digital  
information are being received and/or whether  
the digital signal is interrupted.  
order to feed its video signal (if any) to the TV  
monitor and to provide its analog audio signal for  
recording. When the digital input associated with  
the input selected (e.g. “DVD”) is not selected  
automatically (due to the input settings made ear-  
lier during the system configuration, see page 21),  
select the digital source by pressing the Digital  
• A 1 tells you that there is only a mono channel  
available in the Dolby Digital bitstream.  
The middle number indicates how many discrete  
surround channel signals are present.  
• A "3" tells you that separate, discrete left sur-  
round, center surround and right surround sig-  
nals are present. This is available only on discs  
with DTS-ES digital audio.  
Input Selector button  
G
Û
and then using  
⁄ ¤  
the  
/
buttons  
E
on the remote or the  
Selector buttons 7$on the front panel to  
choose any of the OPTICALor COAXIAL  
inputs, as they appear in the Upper Display  
• A 2 tells you that separate surround left and  
right signals are available. This will be displayed  
for Dolby Digital 5.1 and DTS 5.1 programs.  
Line  
˜
or on-screen display.  
When the digital source is playing, the AVR will  
automatically detect whether it is a multichannel  
Dolby Digital or DTS source or a HDCD, MP3 or  
conventional PCM signal, which is the standard  
output from CD players.  
• A 1 tells you that there is only a single, sur-  
round encoded surround channel. This will  
appear for Dolby Digital bit streams that have  
matrix encoding.  
These indicators are the L/C/R/LFE/SL/SR/SBL/SBR  
letters that are inside the center boxes of the  
• A 0 indicates that there is no surround channel  
information. This will be displayed for two-chan-  
nel stereo programs.  
Note that a digital input (e.g. coaxial) remains  
associated with any analog input (e.g. DVD) as  
soon as it is selected, thus the digital input need  
not be re-selected each time the appropriate  
input choice (e.g. DVD) is made.  
Speaker/Channel Input Indicators  
front panel Main Information Display  
Ú
˜.  
in the  
When a standard analog stereo or matrix  
surround signal is in use, only the “Land “R”  
38 OPERATION  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operation  
indicators will light, as analog signals have only  
left and right channels.  
Night Mode  
only). But the analog two channel signal, even of  
a Dolby Digital (not DTS) source, the ”Downmix”  
to Stereo or Dolby Surround, can be recorded by  
connecting its analog audio outputs to the  
appropriate analog inputs (e.g. DVD) of the AVR.  
Additionally, the digital signals will be passed  
A special feature of Dolby Digital is the Night  
mode, which enables Dolby Digital input sources  
to be played back with full digital intelligibilty  
while reducing the maximum peak level and lift-  
ing the low levels by 1/4 to 1/3. This prevents  
abruptly loud transitions from disturbing others  
without reducing the impact of the digital source.  
The Night mode is available only when the Dolby  
Digital mode is selected.  
Digital signals, however, may have one, two, five,  
six or seven separate channels, depending on the  
program material, the method of transmission  
and the way in which it was encoded. When a  
digital signal is playing, the letters in these  
indicators will light in response to the specific  
signal being received. It is important to note that  
although Dolby Digital, for example, is referred to  
as a “5.1” system, not all Dolby Digital DVDs or  
audio tracks selected on DVD or other Dolby  
Digital programs are encoded for 5.1. Thus, it is  
sometimes normal for a DVD with a Dolby Digital  
soundtrack to trigger only the “Land “R”  
indicators.  
through to the Digital Audio Outputs  
A.  
Tape Recording  
In normal operation, the audio or video source  
selected for listening through the AVR is sent to  
the record outputs. This means that any program  
you are watching or listening to may be recorded  
simply by placing machines connected to the out-  
The Night mode may be engaged when a Dolby  
Digital DVD is playing by pressing the Night  
⁄ ¤  
Button  
B
on the remote. Next, press the  
/
buttons  
E
to select either the middle range or  
full compression versions of the Night mode. To  
turn the Night mode off, press the  
puts for Tape Outputs  
3
or Video 1 or 2  
⁄ ¤  
/
buttons  
Outputs PRWa in the record mode.  
E
until the message in the lower third of the  
NOTE: Many DVD discs are recorded with both  
“5.1” and “2.0” versions of the same sound-  
track. When playing a DVD, always be certain to  
check the type of material on the disc. Most discs  
show this information in the form of a listing or  
icon on the back of the disc jacket. When a disc  
does offer multiple soundtrack choices, you may  
have to make some adjustments to your DVD  
player (usually with the “Audio Select” button or  
in a menu screen on the disc) to send a full 5.1  
feed to the AVR or to select the appropriate  
audio track and thus language. It is also possible  
for the type of signal feed to change during the  
course of a DVD playback. In some cases the pre-  
views of special material will only be recorded in  
2.0 audio, while the main feature is available in  
5.1 audio. As long as your DVD player is set for  
6-channel output, the AVR will automatically  
sense changes to the bitstream and channel  
count and reflect them in these indicators.  
When a digital audio recorder is connected to  
video display and the Lower Display Line  
reads D-RANGEOFF.  
˜
any of the Digital Audio Outputs  
A, you are  
able to record the digital signal using a CD-R,  
MiniDisc or other digital recording system.  
Note that all digital signals will be passed  
through to both, coaxial and optical, digital  
outputs simultanously, no matter which kind of  
digital input was selected.  
The Night mode may also be selected to always  
be on as soon as the Dolby Digital mode is  
activated at either level of compression using the  
options in the SurroundSelectmenu.  
See page 23 for information on using the menus  
to set this option.  
Front Panel In/Outputs  
IMPORTANT NOTES ON DIGITAL PLAYBACK:  
• When the digital playback source is stopped, or  
in a pause, fast forward or chapter search mode,  
the digital audio data will momentarily stop, and  
the channel position letters inside the Speaker/  
In addition to the rear panel digital outputs, the  
AVR offers Harman Kardon’s exclusive config-  
urable front panel output jack feature. For easy  
connection of portable devices, you may switch  
the front panel Digital Coax 4 jack  
Ó
or the  
Channel Indicators  
Ú
will flash. This is nor-  
Video 4 jack from an input to an output by  
Ô
mal and does not indicate a problem with either  
the AVR or the source machine. The AVR will  
return to digital playback as soon as the data is  
available and when the machine is in a standard  
play mode.  
following these steps:  
1. Press the OSD button  
L
to view the  
MASTERMENU(Figure 1).  
Important Note: When a digital surround  
source (Dolby Digital, DTS) is played, the letters  
SBL/SBR for the Surround Back channels will  
appear only when a DTS ES DISCRETE 6.1 source  
is played. Then this surround mode will be  
indicated in the front display and on-screen  
display. With all other recordings the icons for the  
surround back speakers may light (when those  
speakers have been configured) to indicate that a  
signal will be fed to them (Matrix decoded with  
NEO:6, LOGIC 7 or 7 CH Stereo), but no letters  
inside will light as the unit will not receive an  
input signal for the surround back channels.  
2. Press the Set button Fto enter the  
IN/OUTSETUPmenu (Figure 2).  
• Although the AVR will decode virtually all DVD  
movies, CDs and HDTV sources, it is possible that  
some future digital sources may not be compatible  
with the AVR.  
¤
3. Press the button  
E
so that the on-screen  
cursor is next to VIDEO4or  
COAXIAL4depending on which input you  
wish to change to an output. Either input, or  
both may be changed at any time.  
• Note that not all digitally encoded programs  
and not all audio tracks on a DVD contain full  
5.1 or 6.1 channel audio. Consult the program  
guide that accompanies the DVD or laser disc to  
determine which type of audio has been record-  
ed on the disc. The AVR will automatically sense  
the type of digital surround encoding used, indi-  
‹ ›  
/
4. Press either of the  
buttons  
E
so that  
the word OUTis highlighted.  
5. Press the OSD button Lto exit the menus  
and return to normal operation.  
cate it in the Channel Input Indicators  
and adjust to accommodate it.  
Ú
Note that once the setting is made, the appropri-  
ate Input/Output Status Indicator (will  
turn red, indicating that the selected analog or  
digital jacks are now an output, instead of in the  
default setting as an input. Once changed to an  
output, the setting will remain as long as the  
AVR is turned on, unless the setting is changed in  
the OSD menu system, as described above. Note,  
however, that once the AVR is turned off, the set-  
ting is cancelled. When the unit is turned on  
again, the front panel jacks will return to their  
normal default setting as an input. If you wish to  
use the jacks as an output at a future time, the  
setting must be changed again using the OSD  
menu system, as described above.  
The letters used by the Speaker/Channel Input  
Indicators  
Ú
also flash to indicate when a bit-  
• When a Dolby Digital or DTS source is playing,  
you normally may not be able to select some of  
the analog surround modes such as Dolby Pro  
Logic II, Dolby 3 Stereo, Hall, Theater, 5CH/7CH  
Stereo or Logic 7, except with specific Dolby  
Digital 2.0 recordings that can be played with  
the Pro Logic II modes too (see page 34).  
stream has been interrupted. This will happen  
when a digital input source is selected before the  
playback starts, or when a digital source such as  
a DVD is put into a Pause mode. The flashing  
indicators remind you that the playback has  
stopped due to the absence of a digital signal  
and not through any fault of the AVR. This is nor-  
mal, and the digital playback will resume once  
the playback is started again.  
• When a digital source is playing, it is possible  
to make an analog recording using the Tape  
or Video 1 or Video 2 or Warecord outputs,  
even if the source is connected to any digital  
input of the AVR only, as long as "Surround Off"  
mode is selected (possible with a PCM source  
3
OPERATION 39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operation  
NOTES:  
Repeat the procedure as needed until all chan-  
nels requiring adjustment have been set. When  
all adjustments have been made and no further  
adjustments are made for five seconds, the  
AVR will return to normal operation.  
NOTE: The output levels may be separately  
trimmed for each digital and analog surround mode.  
If you wish to have different trim levels for a specific  
mode, select that mode and then follow the instruc-  
tions in the steps shown above.  
• The digital outputs are active only when a digital  
signal is present, and they do not convert an ana-  
log input to a digital signal, or change the format  
of the digital signal (e.g. Dolby Digital to PCM or  
vice versa, but coaxial digital signals are converted  
to optical signals and vice versa). In additon, the  
digital recorder must be compatible with the  
output signal. For example, the PCM digital output  
from a CD player may be recorded on a CD-R or  
MiniDisc, but Dolby Digital or DTS signals may not.  
The channel output may also be adjusted using  
the full-OSD on-screen menu system. First, set the  
volume to a comfortable listening level using the  
With Stereo modes the adjustment procedure  
described above is the only way to trim the out-  
put level, e.g. to match the Stereo level with  
other modes.  
Volume Control  
OSD button to bring up the MASTER  
MENU(Figure 1). Press the Button four  
ıdî. Then, press the  
L
Dim Function  
¤
E
• To make an analog recording from a digital  
source is possible, but only from a PCM source  
(not Dolby Digital or DTS) and correctly only with  
"Surround Off" mode (with any Surround mode  
only the L/R front signals will be fed to the record  
outputs).  
times until the on-screen cursor is next to  
the MANUALSETUPline. Press the Set  
Since the AVR will often be used when movies or  
other video programming is viewed under low-  
light conditions, you may wish to lower the bright-  
ness of the front-panel displays and indicators so  
that they do not distract from the video presenta-  
tion. You may dim the displays using the menu  
system, as shown on page 41, or you may control  
the brightness directly from the remote.  
Button  
line and press the Set Button  
F
, select the CHANNELADJUST  
to activate the  
F
CHANNELADJUSTmenu (Figure 12).  
Output Level Adjustment  
With Source Signals  
* CHANNEL ADJUST *  
FL :  
CEN:  
FR :  
SR :  
0 dB  
0 dB  
0 dB  
0 dB  
SBR:  
SBL:  
SL :  
SUB:  
0 dB  
0 dB  
0 dB  
0 dB  
Normal output level adjustment for the  
Simply press the Dim Button  
D
once to dim  
TEST TONE  
: AUTO OFF MAN  
AVR is established using the test tone, as out-  
lined on page 26. In some cases, however, it may  
be desirable to adjust the output levels using pro-  
gram material such as a test disc, or a selection  
you are familiar with. Additionally, the output  
level for the subwoofer and those for the Stereo  
modes can only be adjusted using this procedure.  
Note that all adjustments made with any input  
will be effective with all inputs selected, just as it  
is the case with the adjustment using the test  
tone.  
the front panel to half the normal brightness level;  
press it again to turn the displays off. Note that  
when the displays are dimmed or turned off, the  
LEVEL RESET: OFF  
ON  
LEVEL TRIM: GLOBAL  
EZSET SETTINGS: OFF ON  
BACK TO MANUAL SETUP  
blue lighting around the Standby/On Switch  
3
will continue to stay lit as a reminder that the AVR  
is still turned on.  
Figure 12  
When the menu appears, the internal test tone  
will be turned off. This will allow you to use your  
external test disc or other source material as the  
⁄ ¤  
The accent lighting for the Volume Control  
ı
will remain at its normal level, rather than dim  
when the panel displays are at half brightness.  
test signal. Then, use the  
/
Buttons  
E
to  
Note that all changes to the front-panel bright-  
ness level are temporary; the displays will return  
to full brightness after the AVR is turned off and  
then on again. To return the displays to full bright-  
ness without turning the unit off, press the Dim  
select the channels to be adjusted. At each  
channel position use the  
change the output level.  
‹ ›  
/
Buttons  
E
to  
To adjust the output levels using program materi-  
al, first select the surround mode for which you  
want to trim the speakers (see NOTE below), start  
your program material source and set the  
Remember, when you are using a disc with test  
signal (e.g. pink noise) or an external signal  
generator as the source, the goal is to have the  
output level at each channel be equal when  
heard at the listening position, with any surround  
mode selected. When your test source is a normal  
disc with music signals, you may adjust the level  
for each channel and surround mode as you pre-  
fer, e.g. you may lower the center channel level  
when you find it to be too high or increase the  
level of the rears when you find it to be too low  
with specific surround modes.  
Button  
D
as needed until the displays are on.  
reference volume for the front left and front right  
channels using the Volume Control  
Once the reference level has been set, press the  
Channel Select button and note that  
FRONTLLEVELwill appear in the Lower  
Display Line . To change the level, first press  
the Set button  
dî.  
In addition to lowering the brightness of the dis-  
plays or turning them off completely, you may  
wish to have them appear whenever a button on  
the remote or front panel is pushed, and then  
gradually fade out after a set time period. You  
may do this by making the appropriate settings in  
the VFDFADETIMEOUTline of the  
ADVANCEDSELECTmenu, as shown on  
page 41.  
C
Ù
˜
F
@
, and then use the  
⁄ ¤  
Selector buttons 7$or the  
/
buttons  
E
to raise or lower the level. DO NOT use the  
volume control, as this will alter the reference  
setting.  
If you wish to reset all the levels to their original  
factory default of 0dB offset, press the  
Memory Backup  
⁄ ¤  
/
Once the change has been made, press the Set  
Buttons  
E
so that the on-screen cursor is next  
This product is equipped with a memory backup  
system that preserves tuner presets and system  
configuration information if the unit is turned off  
completely, accidentally unplugged or subjected  
to a power outage. This memory will last for  
approximately two weeks, after which time all  
information must be reentered.  
button  
tons 7$or the  
F
@
and then press the Selector but-  
‹ ›  
to the LEVELRESETline and press the  
Buttons  
/
⁄ ¤  
/
buttons  
E
to select  
E
so that the word ONis highlight-  
the next output channel location that you wish to  
adjust. To adjust the subwoofer level, press the  
ed. After the levels are reset, resume the proce-  
dure outlined above to reset the levels to the  
desired settings. When all adjustments are done,  
⁄ ¤  
⁄ ¤  
Selector buttons 7$or the  
until WOOFERLEVELappears in the  
Main Information Display or on-screen dis-  
/
buttons  
E
press the  
/
Buttons  
E
to move the on-  
˜
screen cursor so that it is next to BACKTO  
play (only available if the subwoofer is turned  
on).  
MANUALSETUPand then press the Set  
Button  
F
if you wish to go back to the main  
Press the Set button  
the desired channel appears in the Main  
Information Display and on-screen  
F
@
when the name of  
menu to make other adjustments. If you have no  
other adjustments to make, press the OSD  
˜
Button  
L
to exit the menu system.  
display, and follow the instructions shown above  
to adjust the level.  
40 OPERATION  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Features  
The AVR is equipped with a number of advanced  
features that add extra flexibility to the unit’s  
operation. While it is not necessary to use these  
features to operate the unit, they provide addi-  
tional options that you may wish to use.  
adjustment, press the OSD button  
the MASTERMENU(Figure 1) to the screen.  
L
to bring  
Display Brightness  
The AVR’s front panel Main Information  
Press the button  
E, until the on-screen  
Display  
˜
is set at a default brightness level  
cursor is next to the ADVANCEDline. Press the  
Set button to enter the ADVANCED  
that is sufficient for viewing in a normally lit  
room. However, in some home theater installa-  
tions, you may wish to occasionally lower the  
brightness of the display, or turn it off completely.  
F
SELECTmenu (Figure 13).  
Front-Panel-Display Fade  
At the ADVANCEDSELECTmenu make  
In normal operation, the front-panel displays and  
indicators remain on at full brightness, although  
you may also dim them or turn them off as shown  
on page 40. As an additional option, you may also  
set the AVR so that the displays are on whenever  
a button is pressed on the front panel or remote,  
but then fade out after a set period of time.  
certain that the on-screen cursor is next to the  
To change the display brightness setting for a spe-  
cific listening session, you will need to make an  
adjustment in the ADVANCEDSELECT  
menu. To start the adjustment, press the OSD  
VOLUMEDEFAULTline by pressing the  
⁄ ¤  
/
buttons  
E
as needed. Next, press the  
button  
E
so that the word ONis highlighted in  
¤
the video display. Next, press the button  
E
button  
L
to bring the MASTERMENUto  
once so that the on-screen cursor is next to the  
DEFAULTVOLSETline. To set the desired  
‹ ›  
the screen. Press the Button  
screen cursor is next to the ADVANCEDline.  
E, until the on-  
turn-on volume, press the  
/
buttons  
E
or  
To set the front-panel displays to the Fade mode,  
Press the Set Button  
F
to enter the  
hold them pressed until the desired volume level  
is shown on the DEFAULTVOLSETline.  
Note that this setting may NOT be made with the  
regular volume controls.  
press the OSD Button  
L
to bring the Master  
ADVANCEDSELECTmenu (Figure 13).  
⁄ ¤  
Menu to the screen. Press the  
Button  
the ADVANCEDline, and press the Set  
Button to enter the ADVANCED  
SELECTmenu (Figure 13).  
/
Navigation  
To change the brightness setting, at the  
E
so that the © cursor is pointed to  
ADVANCEDSELECTmenu, make certain  
that the on-screen cursor is next to the VFD  
F
NOTE: Since the setting for the turn-on volume  
cannot be heard while the setting is being made,  
you may wish to determine the setting before  
making the adjustment. To do this, listen to any  
source and adjust the volume to the desired level  
line, and press the Button  
E
until the desired  
brightness level is highlighted in the video display.  
When FULLis highlighted, the display is at its  
normal brightness. When HALFis highlighted,  
the display is at half the normal brightness level.  
When OFFis highlighted, all of the indicators in  
the Main Information Display  
Note, however, that the Power Indicator  
will always remain lit to remind you that the unit  
is turned on.  
*
ADVANCED  
SELECT  
*
VFD FADE TIME OUT: OFF  
VFD :FULL HALF OFF  
using the regular volume controls  
dî. When  
VOLUME DEFAULT : OFF ON  
SEMI OSD TIME OUT: 5S  
FULL OSD TIME OUT:20S  
AUTO POLL :OFF ON  
the desired volume level to be used at turn-on is  
reached, make a note of the setting as it appears  
in the lower third of the video screen or in the  
˜
will go dark.  
3,  
BACK TO MASTER MENU  
Main Information Display  
˜.  
A typical volume level will appear as a negative  
number such as -25dB. When making the  
‹ ›  
Figure 13  
If you wish to make other adjustments in the  
adjustment, use the  
this setting.  
/
buttons  
E
to enter  
⁄ ¤  
menu, press the  
/
Buttons  
E
until the on-  
With the ADVANCEDSELECTmenu on  
screen cursor is next to the desired setting or  
⁄ ¤  
your video display, press the  
Button  
/
Navigation  
the BACKTOMASTERMENUline and  
E
so that the © cursor is pointed to  
Unlike some of the other adjustments in this  
menu, the turn-on volume default will remain in  
effect even when the unit is turned off completely,  
unless it is changed or turned off in this menu.  
press the Set button  
F. If you have no other  
the VFDFADETIMEOUTline. Next, press  
adjustments to make, press the OSD Button  
to exit the menu system.  
L
‹ ›  
/
the  
Navigation Button  
E
so that the  
amount of time that you wish the displays to fade  
out after a button is pressed is shown.  
The display brightness may also be changed by  
pressing and holding the Set button on the  
front for three seconds until the message in the  
Main Information Display reads VFD  
FULL. Within five seconds, press the front panel  
Selector buttons 7$until the desired bright-  
ness display level is shown. At that point, press  
If you wish to make other adjustments in the  
@
⁄ ¤  
Once this time is set and the unit returned to nor-  
mal operation, the displays will remain on for the  
time period selected whenever a button is pressed  
on the front panel or remote. After that time they  
will gradually fade out, with the exception of the  
lighting surrounding the Standby/On Switch  
menu, press the  
/
Buttons  
E
until the on-  
screen cursor is next to the desired setting or  
˜
the BACKTOMASTERMENUline and  
press the Set button  
F. If you have no other  
adjustments to make, press the OSD Button  
to exit the menu system.  
L
the Set button  
@
again to enter the setting.  
3, which remains on to remind you that the AVR  
Semi-OSD Settings  
is turned on. Note that if the displays have been  
turned completely off using the Dim Button, as  
shown on page 40, the Fade function will not  
operate.  
Once the desired brightness level is selected, it  
will remain in effect until it is changed again or  
until the unit is turned off.  
The semi-OSD system places one line messages at  
the lower third of the video display screen when-  
ever the Volume, Input Source, Surround mode or  
tuner frequency of any of the configuration set-  
tings are changed. The semi-OSD system is helpful  
in that enables you to have feedback on any con-  
trol changes or remote commands using the video  
display when it is difficult to view the front-panel  
displays. However, you may occasionally prefer to  
turn these displays off for a particular listening  
session. You may also want to adjust the length of  
time the displays remain on the screen. Both of  
those options are possible with the AVR.  
Turn On Volume Level  
If you wish to make adjustments to other items on  
the ADVANCEDSELECTmenu, press the  
⁄ ¤  
As is the case with most audio/video receivers,  
when the AVR is turned on, it will always return to  
the volume setting in effect when the unit was  
turned off. However, you may prefer to always  
have the AVR turn on at a specific setting, regard-  
less of what was last in use when the unit was  
turned off. To change the default condition so that  
the same volume level is always used at turn-on,  
you will need to make an adjustment in the  
ADVANCEDSELECTmenu. To start the  
/
Navigation Button  
E
to place the ©  
cursor next to the desired item, or place the ©  
cursor next to the BACKTOMASTER  
MENUline and press the Set Button  
F
to  
make an adjustment to another menu. If you have  
completed all adjustments, press the OSD  
Button  
L
to exit the menu system.  
ADVANCED FEATURES 41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Features / Multiroom Operation  
To turn off the semi-OSD system, you will need to  
make an adjustment in the ADVANCED  
At the ADVANCEDSELECTmenu make  
certain that the on-screen cursor is next to the  
that the original setting is restored and the auto  
polling is once again activated.  
SELECTmenu (Figure 13). To start the adjust- FULLOSDTIMEOUTline by pressing the  
Since this setting is unique to each input, you  
must return to the IN/OUTSETUPmenu to  
change any other inputs. To do that, press the  
‹ ›  
⁄ ¤  
ment, press the OSD button  
MASTERMENUto the screen. Press the  
Button , until the on-screen  
the ADVANCEDline. Press the Set Button  
L
to bring the  
/
Buttons  
buttons  
E
E
as needed. Next, press the  
until the desired time is dis-  
‹ ›  
/
E
cursor is next to played in seconds. Note that unlike most of the  
/
Navigation Button  
E
so that the cursor  
F
other options in this menu, this is a permanent  
setting change, and the time-out entry will remain  
in effect until it is changed, even when the unit is  
turned off.  
is pointing to the BACKTOMASTER  
MENUline and press the Set Button  
the MASTERMENU(Figure 1), press the  
Navigation Button so that the cursor is  
pointing to the IN/OUTSETUPline. Press  
the Set Button and then follow the instruc-  
to enter the ADVANCEDSELECTmenu.  
F
. At  
At the ADVANCEDSELECTmenu make  
certain that the on-screen cursor is next to the  
⁄ ¤  
‹ ›  
/
E
SEMIOSDline by pressing the  
/
buttons  
so  
If you wish to make other adjustments in the  
menu, press the  
on-screen cursor is next to the desired setting  
⁄ ¤  
E
as needed. Next, press the button  
E
/
Buttons  
E
until the  
F
that the word OFFis highlighted in the video  
tions shown on page 20 to change the input  
source. Return to the ADVANCEDMENUto  
reconfigure the auto poll setting for the newly  
selected input.  
display.  
or the BACKTOMASTERMENUline and  
press the Set button  
adjustments to make, press the OSD Button  
to exit the menu system.  
F. If you have no other  
Note that this setting is temporary and will re-  
main active only until it is changed or until the  
AVR is turned off. Once the unit is turned off, the  
semi-OSD displays will remain activated, even if  
they were switched off for the previous listening  
session.  
L
When all changes to the Auto Poll settings have  
‹ ›  
/
been made, press the  
Navigation Button  
Digital Auto-Poll Settings  
E
to select another configuration option on the  
In order to provide the greatest flexibility in  
ADVANCEDSETUPMenu, move the cursor  
accommodating the widest range of sources, the  
AVR 635 includes both analog and digital audio  
inputs for all sources. In most cases you will want  
to use one or the other, but not both. However, in  
some circumstances it is desirable to make both  
an analog and digital connection between a  
source device and the AVR.  
To change the length of time that the semi-OSD  
displays remain on the screen, go to the  
ADVANCEDSELECTMenu as outlined ear-  
to BACKTOMASTERMENUline and press  
the Set Button  
er menu option, or simply press the OSD Button  
to exit the menu system.  
F
to make a change to anoth-  
⁄ ¤  
lier, and press the  
/
buttons  
E
as needed,  
L
until the on-screen cursor is next to the  
Multiroom Operation  
SEMI-OSDTIMEOUTline. Next, press the  
‹›  
/
Buttons  
E
until the desired time in sec-  
The AVR is fully equipped to operate as the con-  
trol center for a complete multiroom system that  
is capable of sending one source to a second  
zone in the house while separate source is lis-  
tened to in the main room. In addition to provid-  
ing for control over the selection of the remote  
onds is displayed. Note that unlike most of the  
other options in this menu, this is a permanent  
setting change, and the time-out entry will remain  
in effect until it is changed, even when the unit is  
turned off.  
An important application for dual audio connec-  
tions is with cable or satellite boxes, where the  
audio output may change depending on the  
channel being viewed and the type of audio the  
cable system or satellite receiver associates with  
If you wish to make other adjustments in the  
it. To eliminate the need to constantly switch back source and its volume, the AVR offers a com-  
⁄ ¤  
menu, press the  
screen cursor is next to the desired setting or  
/
Buttons  
E
until the on-  
and for to select an audio type each time you  
change channels, the AVR 635 is programmed by  
default to automatically “poll” the audio inputs.  
When a digital audio stream it is selected first,  
but if the digital audio is removed the AVR will  
switch to the analog inputs associated with that  
input as a back-up. In most systems this is the  
correct operation and no further change is  
required.  
prehensive range of options for powering the  
speakers in the second zone.  
the BACKTOMASTERMENUline and  
• Using the line-level Multiroom Audio  
press the Set button  
F. If you have no other  
Outputs  
7, the selected source may be fed to  
adjustments to make, press the OSD Button  
L
optional, external power amplifiers that may be  
matched to the specifics of the installation.  
to exit the menu system.  
• When the main room system is configured for  
5.1 operation, the Surround Back Left/Right  
amplifier channels may be used to power the  
remote zone so that no additional amplifiers are  
required.  
Full-OSD Time Out Adjustment  
The FULLOSDmenu system is used to  
simplify the setup and adjustment of the AVR  
using a series of on-screen menus. The factory  
default setting for these menus leaves them on  
the screen for 20 seconds after a period of inac-  
tivity before they disappear from the screen or  
Time Out. This Time Out is a safety measure to  
prevent the menu text from burning into the CRTs  
in your monitor or projector, which might happen  
if they were left on indefinitely. However, some  
viewers may prefer a slightly longer or shorter  
period before the Time Out display.  
However, if this configuration does not suit your  
system application the AVR 635 gives you the  
flexibility to turn the digital audio auto polling on  
or off on an input-by-input basis. When the Auto  
Polling is set to OFF, the system will keep the  
digital audio input active and not attempt to  
switch to the analog source even when the digital  
data stream stops.  
• Using built-in A-BUS Ready technology, option-  
al A-BUS modules may be connected to the AVR  
via a single Category Five wire, so that remote  
zone speakers may be powered directly from the  
module or keypad without the need for additional  
power, IR sensor or volume control wires to be  
run to the second zone.  
If you wish to change the auto poll setting, first  
select the input you wish to configure by pressing  
In addition, the AVR includes a remote IR sensor  
input so that remote control commands from the  
Zone II remote included with the unit may be  
transmitted to the unit, while standard IR  
input/output jacks allow the remote zone’s com-  
mands to be sent to compatible IR-controlled  
source devices.  
the appropriate Input Selector  
4
on the  
To change the Full-OSD Time Out, you will need  
to make an adjustment in the ADVANCED  
SELECTmenu (Figure 13). To start the adjust-  
remote, or on the SOURCEline pf the  
IN/OUTSETUPmenu (Figure 2). Next, with  
the ADVANCEDSELECTMENU(Figure  
‹ ›  
ment, press the OSD button  
MASTERMENUto the screen. Press the  
button , until the on-screen cursor is next  
to the ADVANCEDline. Press the Set Button  
to enter the ADVANCEDSELECT  
L
to bring the  
13) on the screen, press the  
/
Navigation  
Button  
E
so that the cursor is pointing to the  
E
¤
‹ ›  
AUTOPOLLline. Press the  
Button  
OFFis shown in highlighted video or to ONso  
/
Navigation  
F
E
to change a default setting so that  
menu (Figure 13).  
42 ADVANCED FEATURES / MULTIROOM OPERATION  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Multiroom Operation  
‹ ›  
Installation  
the Multiroom system, press the  
so that MULTIis highlighted in reverse  
video and press the Set Button  
/
Buttons  
*
MULTI-ROOM SETUP  
*
Although simple remote room systems may be  
installed by the average do-it-yourself hobbyist,  
the complexity of your multizone/multiroom sys-  
tem involves running wires inside of walls where  
the services of a specially trained installer may be  
required. Regardless of who does the work,  
please remember that local building codes may  
govern in-wall electrical work, including proper  
specification of any wiring used and the way in  
which it is connected. You are responsible for  
making certain that all Multiroom installation  
work is done properly and in compliance with all  
applicable codes and regulations.  
E
MULTI-ROOM:OFF ON  
MULTI IN :FM PRESET01  
MULTI VOL :H 25dB  
F
.
SB AMPS  
:MAIN MULTI  
Remember that once this setting is made you will  
not be able to take advantage of any of the  
6.1/7.1- channel decoding or processing modes,  
and no Surround Back speakers must be selected  
in the speaker setup procedure outlined earlier. In  
addition the speakers used for the remote zone  
must be connected to the Surround Back/  
c. The volume  
for these speakers is set by the multiroom sys-  
tem, as explained on page 42 of this manual.  
BACK TO MASTER MENU  
Figure 14  
When the MULTI-ROOMmenu appears, the  
on-screen cursor will be at the MULTI-  
ROOMline. Since this line is used to turn the  
system on and off, do not make an adjustment  
here unless you wish to turn the system on at  
this time. To turn the system on, press the but-  
Multiroom Speaker Outputs  
Multiroom Operation  
For standard installations, follow the instructions  
shown on page 16 and 18 for the connection of  
speaker wire and IR remote wiring to the AVR.  
When operating the AVR from a remote room  
location where an IR sensor link has been con-  
nected to the AVR’s rear panel Multiroom IR  
ton  
E
so that ONis highlighted. If you do not  
wish to turn the system on at this time or to pro-  
ceed to the next step, press the Button  
once so that the on-screen cursor is next to  
the MULTIINline.  
For installations where the Surround Back  
Left/Right amplifier channels are used to power  
the remote zone, make certain that the system is  
configured for that type of operation, as shown  
on page 42.  
Input  
O, you may use either the Main remote  
¤
E
control or the Zone II remote. To turn on the mul-  
tiroom feed, press any of the Input Selector  
buttons on the Zone II remote ∫çor the  
Main remote 456. Press the AVR  
to turn the unit on to the last  
source, or any of the other Selector buttons to  
turn on to a specific source.  
‹›  
/
At the MULTIINline, press the  
buttons  
E
until the desired Audio/Video input to the  
multi-room system appears in the highlighted  
video. When the selection has been made, press  
the button  
cursor is next to the MULTIVOLline.  
Selector  
5
For installations where A-BUS modules are used,  
follow the instructions provided with the A-BUS  
remote modules or keypads.  
Additional information will also be made avail-  
able through the Harman Kardon Web Site at  
¤
E
once so that the on-screen  
As long as an IR feed to the AVR has been estab-  
lished from the remote room, using any of the  
buttons on either remote will control the remote  
‹ ›  
/
At the MULTIVOLline, press the  
but-  
tons or hold them pressed until the desired  
E
RS-232 Control  
location volume  
frequency  
or mute the output  
d
Kè  
î
, change the tuner  
, change the tuner preset  
K.  
volume level for the multi-room system is  
entered. DO NOT use the regular volume control  
knobs for this setting. When all settings for the  
multiroom setup have been made, press the  
buttons  
The AVR is rare among A/V receivers in that it  
provides the capability for full remote control  
from compatible computers or specialized remote  
control systems. RS-232 programming requires  
specialized programming knowledge and for that  
reason we recommend that it only be done by  
qualified installers.  
W
©
g
¤
If the Remote IR Output jack  
M
on the AVR is  
E
once so that the on-screen cursor  
connected to an IR Input jack on compatible  
Harman Kardon audio components such as CD,  
DVD or cassette players, the transport functions  
of those machines may also be controlled using  
the Transport Controls PRɃ  
©˙on either remote control.  
is next to the BACKTOMASTERMENU  
line and press the Set button . If you have  
no other adjustments to make, press the OSD  
button to exit the menu system.  
F
NOTE: The RS-232 port on this product is  
for use by authorized service personnel  
ONLY.  
L
Surround Amplifier Channel Assignment  
The AVR is equipped with seven full-power  
amplifier channels to allow for complete 7.1-  
channel operation without the need for addition-  
al external amplifiers. However, in some installa-  
tions you may wish to use the traditional 5.1-  
channel configuration for the main listening  
room, which allows the surround back left/right  
amplifier channels to be used to power speakers  
placed in a remote zone location.  
To turn the system off from the remote room,  
For more information on using the RS-232 port  
for remote control, visit the Harman Kardon Web  
customer service department.  
press the Power-Off button  
0å. Remember  
that the AVR may be turned on or off from the  
remote room regardless of the system’s operation  
or status in the main room.  
Multiroom Setup  
NOTE: When the tuner is selected as the source  
for the remote zone, any change to the frequency  
or preset will also change the station being lis-  
tened to in the main room, if the tuner is in use  
there. Similarly, if someone in the main room  
changes the station, the change will also impact  
the remote room.  
Once the audio and IR link connections have  
been made, the AVR needs to be configured for  
multiroom operation using the steps below. Press  
the OSD button  
MENU(Figure 1) to the screen. Press the  
If you wish to use the Surround Back channel  
amplifiers to power the remote zone, you must  
change a setting in the MULTIROOM  
SETUPmenu. To make that change, first call  
up the menu system by pressing the OSD  
L
to bring the MASTER  
button  
E
twice, until the on-screen cursor is  
next to the MULTI-ROOMline. Press the Set  
button to enter the MULTI-ROOM  
menu (Figure 14).  
To activate the feed to the remote room, press  
F
Button  
L
to bring the MASTERMENU  
the Multiroom button  
c
on the remote.  
¤
(Figure 1) to the screen. Next, press the  
Next, press the Set button  
F
.
Button  
E
until the cursor is next to the  
When the MULTION/OFFmessage  
MULTI ROOMline. Press the Set Button  
to enter the MULTIROOM SETUP  
menu.  
appears in the on-screen display and the Lower  
F
Display Line  
˜
, press the Set Button  
F
⁄ ¤  
and then press the  
/
Navigation Button  
E
so that display changes to MULTION.  
To change the setting so that the Surround Back  
amplifiers are fed by the source selected through  
Press the Set Button Fagain to activate the  
MULTIROOM OPERATION 43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Multiroom Operation / Tuner Operation  
setting. Note that this method may be used to  
turn the Multiroom system on or off even when  
the AVR is in the Standby mode in the main lis-  
tening room.  
that this volume adjustment controls the level for  
the output to the Multiroom Audio Outputs  
and for any speakers connected to the  
Surround Back/Multiroom Speaker Outputs  
when the Surround Back amplifier channels  
are configured for Multiroom use, as shown on  
page 42. This adjustment does NOT change the  
volume level for any room where an ABUS mod-  
ule is used, as that setting is only adjustable  
using the A-BUS module’s volume control or  
built-in IR sensor.  
when an AM or monaural FM station is tuned.  
Press the Tuning buttons again to scan to the  
next receivable station.  
7
When the button is pressed so that MANUAL  
c
IMPORTANT NOTE: When an A-BUS module is  
connected, the AVR’s Multiroom system must be  
turned on before the A-BUS module is able to  
communicate with the AVR. Once turned on  
using the instructions in the preceding para-  
graph, the Multiroom system must remain on in  
order for the A-BUS module to operate.  
appears in the Main Information Display  
each tap of the Selector will increased or  
˜
decrease the frequency by one increment. When  
the tuner receives a strong enough signal for  
adequate reception, MANUALTUNEDwill  
appear in the Main Information Display  
˜.  
4. Stations may also be tuned directly by pressing  
Once the multiroom system is turned on, it will  
remain on even if the AVR is placed in the  
Standby mode in the main room by pressing the  
When the unit is in the Standby mode, but ready  
for Multiroom or A-BUS operation, the lighting  
the Direct button , and then pressing the  
J
Numeric Keys that correspond to the sta-  
H
around the Standby/On Switch  
blue and a MULTIONmessage appears in the  
Lower Display Line , even though the unit  
3
remains  
tion’s frequency. Note that for entering numbers  
higher than 100 you need to enter only the "1"  
rather than "10", the first "0" will be added  
automatically. The desired station will automati-  
cally be tuned after the latest number is entered.  
If you press an incorrect button while entering a  
Power Off Button  
0or the System Power  
Control on the front panel. To turn off the  
2
˜
multiroom system from the main listening room,  
when the AVR is on press the Multiroom button  
is “off” in the main listening room.  
When the multiroom system is turned on, the  
input selected using the Multiroom Menu will be  
c
⁄ ¤  
and then the Set button  
F
. Press the  
/
buttons  
E
so that the Main  
direct frequency, press the Clear button  
X
to  
fed to the Multiroom Output jacks  
7
on the  
Information Display  
˜
or OSD will display  
start over.  
rear panel as well as the A-BUS Jack  
8
.
MULTI OFF.  
The volume will be as set in the same menu,  
although it may also be adjusted using an option-  
al IR sensor and the Zone II remote in the remote  
location or on the optional audio power amplifier  
NOTE: When the FM reception of a stereo  
station is weak, audio quality will be increased  
by switching to Mono mode by pressing the  
Even when the AVR is turned off (to Standby  
mode) and the multiroom system is turned off  
too, the multiroom system may be turned on at  
any time by pressing the Multiroom button  
Tuner Mode button  
ing the Band Selector  
that MANUALappears momentarily in the  
I
on the remote or hold-  
connected to the Multiroom Output jacks  
7.  
!
on the front panel so  
c
, or any of the Selector buttons ∫ç  
in the remote room.  
Although changes to the input source or remote  
room volume will normally be made using an IR  
sensor in the remote room that is connected to  
the AVR, it is also possible to change those set-  
tings from the main listening room. This is useful  
for situations where some or all of the remote  
rooms do not have an IR sensor, or to take con-  
trol over the remote room without actually being  
in that room.  
Main Information Display  
˜
and then goes  
out.  
Basic Tuner Operation  
Preset Tuning  
The AVR’s tuner is capable of tuning AM, FM and  
FM Stereo broadcast stations and receiving RDS  
data. Stations may be tuned manually, or they  
may be stored as favorite station presets and  
recalled from a 30 position memory.  
Using the remote, up to 30 stations may be  
stored in the AVR’s memory for easy recall using  
the front panel controls or the remote.  
To enter a station into the memory, first tune the  
station using the steps outlined above. Then:  
Station Selection  
In addition to using the MULTIROOMmenu,  
as shown on the previous page, you may change  
the source or volume in the remote zone using  
1. Press the Memory button  
Note that two underscore lines will appear in the  
Main Information Display  
Y
on the remote.  
1. Press the AM/FM Tuner Select button  
6
on the remote to select the tuner as an input. The  
tuner may be selected from the front panel by  
˜
.
the remote. Press the Multiroom Button  
c
on the remote, and when the MULTI  
either pressing the Input Source Selector  
until the tuner is active or by pressing the Tuner  
Band Selector at any time.  
%
2. Within five seconds, press the Numeric  
Keys corresponding to the location where  
ON/OFFmessage appears in the on-screen  
display and the Lower Display Line , press  
H
˜
!
you wish to store this station’s frequency. Once  
entered, the preset number will appear in the  
the Set Button  
F
and then press the  
to toggle past  
2. Press the AM/FM Tuner Select button  
6
⁄ ¤  
/
Navigation Button  
E
Main Information Display  
˜.  
or Tuner Band Selector again to switch  
!
that message to MULTILEVELor  
MULTIINPUT.  
between AM and FM so that the desired  
frequency band is selected.  
3. Repeat the process after tuning any additional  
stations to be preset.  
To change the remote room’s input source,  
when MULTIINPUTappears, press the  
⁄ ¤  
3. Press the Tuner Mode button  
remote or hold the Band Selector  
I
on the  
on the  
Recalling Preset Stations  
• To manually select a station previously entered  
in the preset memory, press the Numeric Keys  
!
Set Button  
F
, and then press the  
/
front panel pressed for 3 seconds to select  
manual or automatic tuning.  
Navigation Button  
E
until the desired input  
appears in the on-screen display and in the  
Lower Display Line . Remember that only  
H
that correspond to the desired station’s  
˜
memory location.  
When the button is pressed so that AUTO  
analog or PCM input sources may be selected for  
use with the Multiroom system. Dolby Digital or  
DTS sources are not available to the Multiroom  
system.  
appears in the Main Information Display  
˜
• To manually tune through the list of stored pre-  
set stations one by one, press the Preset  
each press of the Tuning Selectors  
8K  
will  
put the tuner in a scan mode that seeks the next  
higher or lower frequency station with accept-  
able signal strength. An AUTOSTTUNED  
indication will momentarily appear when the sta-  
tion stops at a stereo FM station, and an AUTO  
TUNEDindication will momentarily appear  
Stations Selector buttons  
#
W
on the front  
panel or remote.  
To change the remote room’s volume, when  
MULTILEVELappears, press the Set  
¤
Button  
Button  
F
E
, and press the  
/
Navigation  
to change the volume setting. Note  
44 TUNER OPERATION  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tuner Operation  
Some RDS stations may not include some of  
these additional features. If the data required  
for the selected mode is not being transmitted,  
COUNTRY: Country Music  
NATIONAL: National Music  
OLDIES: Oldies Music  
RDS Operation  
The AVR is equipped with RDS (Radio Data  
System), which brings a wide range of informa-  
tion to FM radio. Now in use in many countries,  
RDS is a system for transmitting station call signs  
or network information, a description of station  
program type, text messages about the station or  
specifics of a musical selection, and the correct  
time.  
the Main Information Display  
˜
will show  
a NOTYPE, NOTEXTor NOTIME  
message after the individual time out.  
FOLK M: Folk Music  
In any FM mode the RDS function requires a  
strong enough signal for proper operation.  
DOCUMENT: Documentary Programs  
TEST: Emergency Test  
Program Search (PTY)  
An important feature of RDS is its capability of  
encoding broadcasts with Program Type (PTY)  
codes that indicate the type of material being  
broadcast. The following list shows the  
abbreviations used to indicate each PTY, along  
with an explanation of the PTY:  
As more FM stations become equipped with RDS  
capabilities, the AVR will serve as an easy-to-use  
center for both information and entertainment.  
This section will help you take maximum advan-  
tage of the RDS system.  
ALARM: Emergency Broadcast Information  
You may search for a specific Program Type (PTY)  
by following these steps:  
1. Press the RDS button  
current PTY is shown in the Main Information  
Display  
^V  
until the  
RDS Tuning  
• (RDS ONLY)  
When an FM station is tuned in and it contains  
RDS data, the AVR will automatically display the  
station’s call sign or other program service in the  
˜
.
• (TRAFFIC)  
2. While the PTY is shown, press the Preset  
Up/Down button or hold them pressed  
#W  
Main Information Display  
˜.  
NEWS: News  
to scroll through the list of available PTY types,  
as shown above starting with the PTY currently  
received. To simply search for the next station  
transmitting any RDS data, use the Preset  
RDS Display Options  
AFFAIRS: Current Affairs  
INFO: Infomation  
The RDS system is capable of transmitting a  
wide variety of information in addition to the  
initial station call sign that appears when a  
station is first tuned. In normal RDS operation  
the display will indicate the station name,  
broadcast network or call letters. Pressing the  
Up/Down button  
#W  
until RDSONLY  
SPORT: Sports  
appears in the display.  
EDUCATE: Educational  
DRAMA: Drama  
3. Press any of the Tuning Up/Down buttons  
, the tuner begins to scan the FM band  
)K  
RDS button  
^V  
enables you to cycle  
upwards or downwards for the first station that  
has RDS data that matches the desired  
selection, and acceptable signal strength for  
quality reception.  
through the various data types in the following  
sequence:  
CULTURE: Culture  
SCIENCE: Sciencek  
• The station’s call letters (with some private  
stations other information too).  
4. The tuner will make up to one complete scan  
of the entire FM band for the next station that  
matches the desired PTY type and has accept-  
able reception quality. If no such station is  
found, the display will read NONEfor some  
seconds and the tuner will return to the last FM  
station in use before the search.  
VARIED: Varied Speech Programs  
POPM: Popular Music  
• The station’s frequency (FREQ).  
• The Program Type (PTY) as shown in the list  
below.  
ROCKM: Rock Music  
NOTE: Many stations do not transmit a specific  
PTY. The display will show NONE, when such a  
station is selected and PTY is active.  
M.O.R.M.: Middle-of-the-Road Music  
LIGHTM: Classical Music  
CLASSICS: Serious Classical Music  
OTHERM: Other Music  
NOTE: Some stations transmit constant traffic  
information. These stations can be found by  
selecting TRAFFIC, the option in front of  
NEWSin the list. The AVR will find the next  
appropriate station, even if it is not broadcasting  
traffic information when the search is made.  
• A “text” message (Radiotext, RT) containing  
special information from the broadcast station.  
Note that this message may scroll across the  
display to permit messages longer than the eight  
positions in the display. Depending on signal  
quality, it may take up to 30 seconds for the text  
message to appear; in that time, the word  
TEXTwill flash in the Information Display  
when RT is selected.  
WEATHER: Weather Information  
FINANCE: Financial Programs  
CHILDREN: Children’s Programs  
SOCIAL A: Social Affairs Programs  
RELIGION: Religious Broadcasts  
PHONE IN: Phone-In Programs  
TRAVEL: Travel and Touring  
LEISURE: Leisure and Hobby  
JAZZ: Jazz Music  
• The current time of day (CT). Note that it may  
take up to two minutes for the time to appear,  
in that time the word TIMEwill flash in the  
information display when CT is selected. Please  
note that the accuracy of the time data is  
dependent on the radio station, not the AVR.  
TUNER OPERATION 45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming the Remote  
For this example, we will select “TV” to enter the  
codes needed to operate your TV.  
Configuring the Remote  
P R E S S  
C O D E  
A
N U M B E R  
1
O F 1 0  
The AVR 635 remote is factory-programmed for  
all functions needed to operate the unit. In addi-  
tion, it is also preprogrammed to operate most  
recent Harman Kardon DVD players and chang-  
ers, CD players and changers, CD recorders and  
cassette decks. The codes for other brand devices  
may be programmed into the AVR 635 remote  
using its extensive library of remote codes or a  
head-to-head learning process for codes not in  
the internal library.  
S E L E C T  
T V  
A
D E V I C E  
Figure 20  
8. After you press and release the number key,  
watch the device being programmed to see  
whether it turns off. As shown in the instruc-  
tions that will appear on the next menu screen  
(Figure 21), if your device has turned off, press  
the Set Button  
10. If the unit does not turn off, proceed to the  
next step.  
Figure 17  
NOTE: The codes for hard-drive recorder prod-  
ucts (PVR) such as TiVo and Replay are pro-  
grammed by selecting VCR as the device. For  
satellite-based TiVo products, check under the  
brand name of the product.  
F, and then skip to Step  
5. At the next menu screen on the remote (Figure  
Thanks to the remote’s advanced technology and  
two-line LCD display, it is no longer necessary to  
look up cumbersome codes when programming  
the remote; following the steps outlined below,  
you simply search for the brand name from the  
remote’s memory. We recommend that you first  
try the preprogrammed code entry method. If  
that procedure is not successful, then try the  
code learning method.  
18) press the Set Button  
F
to enter the  
P O W E R O F F ? Y : S E T  
N : N E X T # O R C L R  
Manual mode, which means that you will  
select the brand name of the device from the  
list programmed into the remote’s memory.  
Figure 21  
9. If the device being programmed into the AVR  
remote does not turn off after you have  
P R O G R A M D E V I C E  
M A N U A L  
pressed the “1” key, continue Steps 8 and 9 by  
pressing the available numeric keys shown  
until the device turns off. If the device still does  
not turn off after all choices have been tried,  
or if there is only one number key shown as  
available to try, the code for this specific  
device is not in the AVR remote library under  
that brand name. If that is the case, press the  
Clear Button  
gramming mode. Remember that the codes  
may still be stored in the AVR remote’s library  
under another brand, and you can have the  
remote control search for them by following  
the instructions below for automatic program-  
ming. You may also manually “learn” the  
codes for most devices into the AVR remote by  
following the Learning Commands instructions  
on page 47.  
Figure 18  
6. The next menu screen on the remote (Figure  
19) will show the start of the list of available  
⁄¤  
Preprogrammed Code Entry  
The easiest way to program the AVR remote for  
operation with a source device from another  
brand is to follow these steps:  
brands. Press the  
Navigation Buttons  
E
until the brand name of the device you  
are programming into the remote appears on  
the lower line of the display and then press  
1. Turn on the power to the device you wish to  
program into the AVR remote. This is impor-  
tant, as in a later step you will need to see  
whether the device turns off to determine  
whether the remote has been programmed for  
the proper remote codes.  
X
to exit the manual pro-  
the Set Button  
F.  
S E L E C T B R A N D  
R C A  
Figure 19  
NOTE: If the brand name for the product you  
wish to program does not appear in the list, the  
codes may still be available, as some manufactur-  
ers share codes. If the desired brand is not listed,  
2. Press and hold the Program Button  
about three seconds while the message shown  
in Figure 15 appears in the remote’s LCD  
a
for  
Information Display  
ton when the red light under the Set Button  
appears.  
2. Release the but-  
press the Clear Button  
X
to exit the pro-  
10. When the device being programmed does  
turn off after a numeric key has been  
gramming process, and skip to the instructions  
shown on page 47 for the “Automatic” method  
of programming the remote. If desired, or if the  
codes for your brand are not part of the remote’s  
library at all, you may still use the AVR remote to  
program most infrared-controlled products by  
“learning” the commands from the product’s  
original remote into the AVR remote. The instruc-  
tions for Learning Commands are on page 47.  
F
pressed, you must press the Set Button  
F
H O L D P R O G B U T T O N  
F O R S E C O N D S  
within five seconds to enter the setting into  
the remote’s memory. After you press the Set  
button, the top line of the LCD display will  
read SAVING… and then the word SAVED  
will flash four times in the center of the bot-  
tom line.  
3
Figure 15  
3. The remote’s MAIN MENU message (Figure  
16), will appear in the LCD display and the  
Set Button  
red. Press the Set Button  
F
will remain illuminated in  
to begin the  
11. When the codes are saved the remote will  
return to normal operation, and whenever  
F
7. The next step is important, as it determines  
which codes will operate the source device or  
display. Point the AVR remote at the device  
being programmed and, following the instruc-  
tions shown in the remote’s LCD  
process of selecting a device and locating the  
proper remote codes.  
you press the Input Selector Button  
4
that was just programmed, the codes for the  
new device will be used. If no further buttons  
are pressed, the remote will revert back to  
the default setting for AVR commands.  
M A I N M E N U  
P R O G R A M D E V I C E  
Information Display  
the Numeric Keys  
2
, press and release  
Figure 16  
H
shown on the menu  
NOTE: Some brands share a common remote  
control code for “Power Off” for many models.  
For that reason it is possible that even though  
the remote appears to be properly programmed,  
you may find that some buttons do not appear to  
issue the correct command. If this is the case,  
repeat the procedure outlined above, but if more  
than one numeric key selection is suggested in  
Step 7, try a different number to see whether the  
remote operates correctly.  
4. SELECT A DEVICE will appear in the LCD  
screen (Figure 20) one at a time, starting with  
the “1” button. After you press the “1”  
display (Figure 17).  
⁄¤  
Press the  
Navigation Buttons  
E
to  
Button  
H, the remote’s LCD screen will  
scroll through the list of device categories and  
press the Set Button when the device  
briefly go blank as the code is being transmit-  
ted, but you will see the “transmit” icon  
in the upper right corner of the display to  
serve as confirmation that the remote is send-  
ing out commands.  
F
you wish to set the codes for appears.  
46 PROGRAMMING THE REMOTE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming the Remote  
Although the AVR remote is preprogrammed with  
an extensive library of codes for many major  
brands, it is also possible that you may have  
attempted to program a product that is too new  
or too old, and thus not all of its commands will  
be in the code library. You may fill in the codes  
for any button that does not operate properly by  
using the learning technique shown on page 47.  
right corner of the LCD display’s top line to  
remind you that the remote is working even  
though you may not see anything happening  
to the device being programmed.  
11. When pressing the “1” button does not turn  
the device being programmed back on,  
repeat the procedure by trying the remainder  
of the Numeric Keys  
H
in sequence, each  
time pressing and then releasing the button  
to see whether the new device turns back on.  
When it does, skip to the next step. However,  
if you try all 10 numeric keys and find that  
the unit will not turn on, you won’t be able  
to use this method to program the device.  
7. It will take a few seconds for the remote to  
send out the first group of commands, after  
which you will see a new display in the LCD  
screen, as shown in Figure 23. Following the  
instructions, if the device being programmed  
Automatic Code Entry  
has NOT turned off, press the Navigation  
Press the Clear Button  
X
to exit the  
In addition to manual code selection using the  
brand name list, it is also possible to automati-  
cally search through all the codes that are stored  
in the AVR remote’s library to see whether a  
device will respond even if it is not listed among  
the brands that appear when you program the  
remote manually. To automatically search  
Buttons  
E
again to send another group of  
programming process. You’ll need to follow  
the Learning Commands instructions below  
to enter the codes for this device into the  
AVR remote.  
codes. If the device being programmed has  
turned off, skip to Step 9.  
P O W E R O F F ?  
Y - > 1 ~ 0 N - >  
12. When pressing one of the numeric keys in  
Step 10 or 11 causes the device being  
Figure 23  
through the codes that are available for a specific  
device type (e.g., DVD, VCR), follow these steps:  
programmed to turn back on, follow the  
instructions shown in Figure 22 and press the  
8. By pressing the Navigation Buttons  
again, the remote will send out a new set of  
commands. When it pauses, follow the instruc-  
tions shown in Step 7. Depending on how  
many codes are stored for a specific device  
type, you may have to repeat this process as  
many as fifteen times. Remember, if the device  
turns off, skip to Step 9. When all the codes for  
the device being programmed have been tried,  
the instruction shown in Figure 24 will appear.  
This means that the codes for the product you  
are trying to program are not in the AVR  
remote library and you will have to “learn”  
them into the remote following the instruc-  
tions shown on page 47. Press the Set  
E
Set Button  
F
within five seconds of the  
1. Turn on the power to the device you wish to  
program into the AVR remote. This is impor-  
tant, as in a later step you will need to see  
whether the device turns off to determine  
whether the remote has been programmed for  
the proper remote codes.  
device turning on. After you press the Set  
button, the top line of the LCD display will  
read SAVING… and then the word SAVED  
will flash four times in the center of the  
bottom line.  
13. When the codes are saved, the remote will  
return to normal operation, and whenever  
2. Press and hold the Program Button  
a
for  
about three seconds while the message shown  
in Figure 15 appears in the remote’s LCD  
you press the Input Selector Button  
4
that was just programmed, the codes for the  
new device will be used. If no further buttons  
are pressed, the remote will revert back to  
the default setting for AVR commands.  
Information Display  
ton when the red light under the Set Button  
appears.  
2. Release the but-  
F
3. The remote’s MAIN MENU message (Figure  
16) will appear in the LCD display and the Set  
Button  
F
as instructed to exit the program-  
Learning Commands  
ming process.  
Button  
Press the Set Button  
F
will remain illuminated in red.  
to begin the  
On occasions when the AVR remote does not  
contain the codes for a particular product’s  
remote in its built-in library, or when you wish to  
program a missing or special function into one  
button of a device, the AVR remote’s learning  
capability allows you to do that. To teach com-  
mands from one product’s remote into the AVR  
remote, follow these steps:  
F
R E A C H E N D P O I N T  
E X I T - > S E T K E Y  
process of selecting a device and locating the  
proper remote codes.  
Figure 24  
4. SELECT A DEVICE will appear in the  
LCD display (Figure 17).  
⁄¤  
9. If the device being programmed does turn off  
after following the instructions in Step 7, you  
will need to verify the code set by pressing the  
Press the  
Navigation Buttons  
E
to  
scroll through the list of device categories and  
press the Set Button when the device  
Numeric Keys  
H
in sequence, as instructed  
F
in Figure 23. Point the remote at the device  
being programmed, and press the “1Button  
The process requires that both the device’s origi-  
nal remote and the AVR remote be available.  
Before pressing any buttons on either remote,  
place them so that the IR transmitter on the  
remote from the device to be programmed is fac-  
for which you wish to set the codes appears.  
For this example, we will select “TV” to enter  
the codes needed to operate your TV.  
H
to see whether the device turns back on.  
10. After pressing and releasing the “1Button  
, check to see whether the device has  
turned back on. If it has, skip to Step 12. If it  
does not turn on, press the “2Button  
5. At the next menu screen on the remote (Figure  
H
18), press the Navigation Buttons  
E
ing the Infrared Lens  
1
on the AVR’s remote.  
so that the bottom line of the LCD display  
reads AUTO (Figure 22) and then press the  
The two remotes should be no more than an inch  
apart, and there should not be any direct  
sunlight or other bright light source near the  
remotes.  
H
,
or the next button in the numeric sequence if  
you are repeating the procedure, as instruct-  
ed by the LCD screen in Figure 25.  
Set Button  
F
to enter the Automatic pro-  
gramming mode.  
1. Press and hold the Program Button  
about three seconds while the message shown  
in Figure 15 appears in the remote’s LCD  
a
for  
P R O G R A M D E V I C E  
A U T O  
P O W E R O N ?  
Y - >S E T N - >1 ~ 0  
Figure 22  
Information Display  
ton when the red light under the Set Button  
appears.  
2. Release the but-  
Figure 25  
6. As instructed on the next menu screen, press  
the Navigation Buttons  
E
to begin  
F
the automatic code search process. Your con-  
firmation that the remote is sending out com-  
mands is the movement of a square block  
across the top line of the LCD display screen  
while the bottom line reads PLEASE WAIT….  
You will also see the transmit icon in the upper  
2. The remote’s MAIN MENU message (Figure  
16), will appear in the LCD display and the  
Set Button  
red. Press the Navigation Buttons  
Fwill remain illuminated in  
E
once so that Learn appears on the bottom line  
PROGRAMMING THE REMOTE 47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming the Remote  
of the LCD screen, as shown in Figure 26.  
8. Continue to hold the button on the original  
remote until the AVR’s display changes  
Selectors  
4
so that whenever that button is  
Press the Set Button  
F
to begin the  
pressed, you will not only be selecting that  
device as the AVR’s input and telling the remote  
to use the remote codes that have been pro-  
grammed to belong to that device, it also allows  
you to have that special code transmitted, as  
well. This allows you to have an input (or other  
command) sent to a display so that when video  
sources are directly connected to the display, you  
can automatically command it to switch to the  
same input selected for the AVR.  
process of learning commands from another  
device’s remote into the AVR remote.  
again. If the code was successfully learned,  
you will see the display shown in Figure 25.  
In that case, skip to the next step. If the  
LEARN FAILED display (Figure 30) appears  
again you may either try to program the key  
M A I N M E N U  
L E A R N  
again, or press the Navigation Buttons  
Figure 26  
E
to stop the process. It is possible that  
3. The SELECT A DEVICE message will appear  
some remotes may use code sequences or  
infrared frequencies that are not compatible  
with the AVR remote, and those codes can-  
not be learned. When the display shown in  
Figure 31 appears, press the Set Button  
⁄¤  
in the LCD display (Figure 17). Press the  
Navigation Buttons  
the list of device categories and press the Set  
Button when the device for which you  
E
to scroll through  
To learn a remote code into one of the Input  
Selectors  
above for learning the keys for an entire device  
remote with the following exceptions:  
F
4, follow the same steps shown  
wish to set the codes appears. For this exam-  
ple, we will select “TV” to enter the codes  
needed to operate your TV.  
F
to exit the Learning system.  
L E A R N F A I L E D  
E X I T  
⁄ ¤  
/
• In Step 3, press the  
Button  
Navigation  
4. The next menu screen (Figure 27) will prompt  
you to select the button, or “key,” on the AVR  
remote that you wish to program. Press that  
button on the AVR remote.  
E
until LEARNDEVICE  
Figure 31  
appears in the bottom line of the LCD display.  
9. When a code has been learned successfully,  
you have three options. When the display  
shown in Figure 29 is on the LCD screen on  
the AVR remote, you may press the Set  
• When the SELECTADEVICEmessage  
(Figure 26) appears, as described in Step 4,  
press the specific Input Selector Button  
S E L E C T  
A
K E Y  
T O P R O G R A M  
4
that you wish to have transmit a special  
Button  
F
to learn additional codes from  
Figure 27  
code when it is pressed.  
the buttons on a remote into the AVR  
remote. Follow Steps 4 through 8 as often as  
needed to complete the code-learning  
process.  
5. Once you press the button to be programmed  
on the AVR remote, press and hold the button  
on the remote control for the device to be  
programmed within five seconds, as instructed  
on the next menu screen (Figure 28).  
• When the RENAMEDEVICEoption is  
offered by the remote after the code is pro-  
grammed, you will be changing the name that  
is shown in the remote’s LCD display every  
time that Input Selector is pressed.  
10. If you wish to change the name that appears  
in the LCD display when the button that has  
just had a new code learned is pressed,  
P R E S S K E Y O N  
Device Priority  
O R I G I N A L R E M O T E  
press the Navigation Buttons  
E
so  
that the display shown in Figure 32 appears  
After having programmed or learnt the different  
sources, you can set the Device Priority. The  
default setting is that after pressing one of the  
Input Selectors and any of its function keys, the  
remote control defaults back to controlling the  
AVR functions after 6 seconds. You can either  
extend this time to 12 seconds, or leave the  
remote control to control the last used source,  
by following the steps below.  
Figure 28  
in the LCD display. Press the Set Button  
to open the RENAME KEY menu. Enter the  
new name for the key following the instruc-  
tions shown in the Renaming Individual Keys  
section of this manual on page 48. If you find  
it more convenient to rename the buttons at  
a later time, you may do that separately by  
following the instructions on page 52.  
F
6. Continue to hold the button on the original  
remote until the menu on the AVR remote’s  
LCD screen changes. If the code is successfully  
learned you will see the display shown in  
Figure 29. If you see that menu, proceed to  
Step 9. If the code is not successfully learned,  
you will see the display shown in Figure 30. If  
that menu appears, proceed to Step 7.  
1. Press and hold the Program Button  
a
L E A R N M E N U  
R E N A M E K E Y  
until the MAIN MENU appears.  
L E A R N M E N U  
L R N A N O T H E R K E Y  
¤
2. Press the Navigation Button  
E
until  
Figure 32  
DEVICE PRIORITY appears. Press the Set  
Figure 29  
11. When you have programmed all keys for the  
Button  
F.  
desired device, press the Navigation  
L E A R N F A I L E D  
R E T R Y  
⁄ ¤  
/
3. Press the  
Navigation Button  
E
to  
Buttons  
E
twice when the LEARN  
select the requested setting. Confirm the set-  
MENU (Figure 29) appears so that you see  
the display show in Figure 33. The remote  
will return to normal operation.  
Figure 30  
ting by pressing the Set Button  
F.  
7. If the message shown in Figure 26 appears in  
the display, press the Set Button  
Changing Devices  
F
to try  
L E A R N M E N U  
programming the button again. When the  
remote prompts you to press and hold the key  
on the original remote again by showing the  
display shown in Figure 28, immediately press  
the button on the source remote again. To  
avoid another failed attempt, make certain  
that the windows on the two remotes are fac-  
ing one another.  
In the factory default settings, the AVR remote is  
programmed so that the commands transmitted  
correspond to the device selected by pressing  
E N D L E A R N I N G  
Figure 33  
one of the Input Selectors  
4. This is logical,  
12. If you wish to program the codes for another  
device, repeat the procedure outline above,  
but select a different device in Step 3.  
as you want the remote to control the device  
you have selected. However, in some circum-  
stances you may have configured your system so  
that the devices connected to the AVR do not  
correspond to the default device settings and  
the legends printed on the remote. For example,  
if your system has two VCRs you may connect  
the second VCR to the VID 2 input. There is no  
Learning Codes for an Input  
Selector  
The AVR 635’s remote allows you to learn a spe-  
cific code to be attached to one of the Input  
48 PROGRAMMING THE REMOTE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming the Remote  
problem in doing that, but in normal operation  
the commands issued after selecting the VID 2  
input are for a television, not a VCR.  
will scroll to its right. For example, press the  
9. When the device being programmed does  
turn off after a numeric key has been  
Navigation Buttons  
E
until the display  
screen reads TV<-VCR to have the VID 2/TV  
Button transmit the commands used to control  
pressed, you must press the Set Button  
within five seconds to enter the setting into  
the remote’s memory. After you press the Set  
button, the top line of the LCD display will  
read SAVING... and then the word SAVED  
will flash four times in the center of the bot-  
tom line.  
F
The AVR remote allows you to correct that situa-  
tion through the “Changing Devices” process.  
That enables you to assign the codes from one  
type of device to a different button. For example,  
in the steps below, we will explain how to pro-  
gram the VID 2 buttons to provide the commands  
to operate a VCR. Of course, you may program  
the remote to have any of the devices take on  
the code set of any other device, as your system  
requires. And, with the AVR remote’s “Rename”  
function, you can even change the way the name  
of the device appears on the remote’s LCD dis-  
play so that you see exactly which commands are  
being sent.  
a VCR. Press the Set Button  
F
when the  
desired device combination appears.  
N E W D E V I C E T Y P E  
T V <- V C R  
10. When the codes are saved the remote will  
return to normal operation, and whenever  
Figure 36  
5. Once the new device is selected, the remain-  
der of the process will select the codes for the  
specific brand to be used, and for that reason  
they are identical to the way a device is pro-  
grammed using manual entry. Continue the  
process as outlined in the next few steps,  
remembering that if the codes for your specific  
device are not found you may select any brand  
and then “learn” the proper codes into the  
AVR remote using the process outlined on  
page 47. To begin the process, start by select-  
ing the brand of device, as shown in Figure 19.  
⁄¤  
you press the Input Selector Button  
4
that was just programmed, the display will  
show the original device type code at the far  
left side of the display, with the name of the  
new code set type in brackets. For example,  
the display will read TV<-VCR in our exam-  
ple of replacing the TV codes with those for a  
VCR.  
To program the buttons normally assigned to one  
device for the commands of another, follow these  
steps:  
Macro Programming  
1. Press and hold the Program Button  
a
for  
Macros enable you to easily repeat frequently  
used combinations of multiple remote control  
commands with the touch of a single button.  
Once a macro is programmed you may send up  
to 20 commands with one press of the Power On  
or Macro buttons. This will greatly simplify the  
process of turning on your system, changing  
devices or other common tasks. Thanks to the  
remote’s two-line display, it is easier than ever  
for you to take advantage of the power of macro  
commands.  
about three seconds while the message shown  
in Figure 15 appears in the remote’s LCD  
Press the  
Navigation Buttons  
E
until the brand name of the device you are  
programming into the remote appears on the  
lower line of the display and then press the  
Information Display  
ton when the red light under the Set Button  
appears.  
2. Release the but-  
F
Set Button  
F.  
2. The remote’s MAIN MENU message (Figure  
16), will appear in the LCD display and the  
6. The next step is important, as it determines  
which codes will operate the source device or  
display. Point the AVR remote at the device  
being programmed and, following the instruc-  
tions shown on the remote’s LCD  
Set Button  
red. Press the Navigation Buttons  
Fwill remain illuminated in  
E
twice so that CHANGE DEVICE appears on  
the bottom line of the LCD screen, as shown in  
Recording a Macro  
To record a macro into the remote’s memory,  
follow these steps:  
Information Display  
the Numeric Keys  
ing with the “1” button. After you press the  
1Button the remote’s LCD screen will  
2
, press and release  
Figure 34. Press the Set Button  
F
to begin  
H
one at a time, start-  
the process of reassigning the commands used  
for a particular device.  
H
1. Press and hold the Program Button  
a
for  
M A I N M E N U  
briefly go blank as the code is being transmit-  
ted, but you will see the “transmit” icon in the  
upper right corner of the display to serve as  
confirmation that the remote is sending out  
commands.  
about three seconds while the message shown  
in Figure 15 appears in the remote’s LCD  
C H A N G E D E V I C E  
Information Display  
button when the red light under the Set  
Button appears.  
2. Release the  
Figure 34  
3. The next menu display is where you select the  
Input Select, or device, that you wish to  
change. When the display shown in Figure 35  
⁄¤  
F
7. After you press and release the number key,  
watch the device being programmed to see  
whether it turns off. As shown in the instruc-  
tions that will appear on the next menu screen  
2. The remote’s MAIN MENU message (Figure  
16), will appear in the LCD display and the  
appears, press the  
Navigation  
Set Button  
red. Press the Navigation Buttons  
Fwill remain illuminated in  
Buttons  
E
to scroll through the list to find  
E
the device you wish to use for another func-  
tion. In this case we will select “TV,” and show  
how to change it to take on the codes for  
operating a VCR. When that device’s name  
(Figure 21), press the Set Button  
F, and  
three times so that MACRO appears on the  
bottom line of the LCD screen, as shown in  
then skip to Step 9. If the unit does not turn  
off, proceed to the next step.  
Figure 37. Press the Set Button  
F
to enter  
the main macro menu branch.  
appears, press the Set Button  
F.  
8. If the device being programmed into the AVR  
remote does NOT turn off after you have  
M A I N M E N U  
M A C R O  
O L D D E V I C E T Y P E  
T V  
pressed the “1” key, continue Steps 6 and 7 by  
pressing the available numeric keys shown  
until the device turns off. If the device still does  
not turn off after all choices have been tried,  
the code for this specific device is not in the  
AVR remote library under that brand name. If  
that is the case, we suggest that you press the  
Figure 37  
Figure 35  
3. At the next menu screen (Figure 38) press the  
4. Once the “old” device type has been selected,  
you need to tell the remote which set of  
Set Button  
F
to begin recording a macro.  
remote codes to use as a replacement for the  
device just selected. When the instructions  
M A C R O  
R E C O R D  
A
M A C R O  
Set Button  
F
to accept the codes from  
⁄¤  
shown in Figure 36 appear, press the  
another brand so that the programming is  
completed, but remember that you will then  
have to program the remote manually by fol-  
lowing the Learning Commands instructions  
on page 47.  
Figure 38  
Navigation Buttons  
E
to scroll through  
the list of device categories to find the name  
of the device that you wish to use. The old  
device name will remain on the left side of the  
LCD screen, while the replacement device list  
4. The next display screen (Figure 39) is where  
you select the button that will be used to  
recall the macro. The choices are the Power  
On Button  
3
or one of the discrete Macro  
PROGRAMMING THE REMOTE 49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming the Remote  
⁄¤  
Buttons  
Buttons  
U
E
. Press the  
Navigation  
order they will be used. Press each button  
within five seconds of the last button, remem-  
bering to press the Input Selector 45  
when you are changing device functions.  
As the buttons on the remote are pressed,  
the remote’s display screen will show the  
steps in the macro as they are programmed  
(Figure 43).  
bottom line of the LCD screen, as shown in  
until the name of the button  
Figure 37. Press the Set Button  
F
to enter  
you wish to program the macro into is shown.  
For this example we will show how to pro-  
gram a series of commands that will automat-  
ically be sent out every time the Power button  
is pressed.  
the main macro menu branch.  
3. At the next menu screen (Figure 44) press  
⁄¤  
Navigation Buttons  
E
until the  
bottom line in the remote’s LCD display reads  
ERASE A MACRO, as shown in Figure 44.  
Press the Set Button  
F
to begin the  
R E C O R D  
A
M A C R O  
process of erasing a macro.  
P O W E R O N  
[ A V R ]  
[ A V R ] P O W E R O N  
M A C R O  
Figure 39  
E R A S E  
A
M A C R O  
Figure 43  
5. The next screen that appears (Figure 40) is  
where you select the device for the first com-  
mand that will be sent out as part of the  
⁄¤  
9. For our example, we first want the AVR Power  
On button pressed, followed by the TV Power  
On, followed by the Cable Box On, followed  
by the selection of the Logic 7 mode. To do  
that, press the buttons in this order:  
Figure 44  
4. The next display screen (Figure 45) is where  
you select which macro will be erased. Press  
⁄¤  
macro. Press the  
Navigation Buttons  
E
until the name of the device appears on  
the  
Navigation Buttons  
E
until the  
the left side of the lower line in the LCD dis-  
play. For this example, the first button we  
want to have the macro “press” is the Power  
On button, so the AVR device is selected.  
Press the Set Button  
device name appears to move to the next pro-  
gramming step.  
number of the macro you wish to erase  
appears. For this example we will erase the  
Power On macro created in the previous sec-  
tion. When the name of the macro to be  
• Power On  
• VID 2/TV  
• Power On  
• VID 3/Cable  
• Power On  
• AVR  
• Logic 7  
3
4
3
4
F
when the desired  
erased appears, press the Set Button  
F.  
3
E R A S E  
A
M A C R O  
5
P O W E R O N  
O
S E L E C T  
A V R  
A
D E V I C E  
Figure 45  
As each button is pressed to enter it into the  
macro you will see the button names appear  
and then scroll up on the LCD display as your  
confirmation of the key entry (Figure 43).  
5. The word ERASED will flash four times in the  
bottom line of the remote’s LCD display, and  
then the display will return to its normal con-  
dition. When that happens the macro is  
erased and the remote is returned to normal  
operation.  
Figure 40  
6. The next display (Figure 41) is where you  
begin entering the individual commands for  
the macro, in the order you wish them to be  
transmitted. Remember that when you want  
to change devices, you must first press the  
Input Selector 45for that button, and  
then press the Command or Function key.  
Since we want to program a series of events  
that occur each time the Power On button is  
pressed, press the AVR button. In your specific  
macro, this is the first command button.  
10. When all commands for the macro have  
been entered, press the Set Button  
F
to  
save the macro. The display screen will show  
the button to which the macro has been pro-  
grammed and the number of steps used, and  
the word SAVED will blink four times in the  
lower line of the LCD display. When the dis-  
play returns to normal, the macro has been  
entered and the remote is ready for opera-  
tion.  
Read a Macro  
To check the commands stored in the remote’s  
memory for one of the buttons, follow these  
steps:  
1. Press and hold the Program Button  
about three seconds while the message  
shown in Figure 15 appears in the remote’s  
LCD Information Display . Release the  
button when the red light under the Set  
Button appears.  
a
for  
S E L E C T  
A V R  
A
D E V I C E  
11. If a macro has been programmed into the  
2
Power On Button  
3, it will play back  
anytime the Power On button is pressed. As  
the macro plays, you will see the steps  
appear in the remote’s LCD display. Macros  
programmed into one of the four discrete  
Macro buttons may be activated at any time  
by pressing the appropriate button.  
Figure 41  
F
7. The next display (Figure 42) and the subse-  
quent screens are where the actual macro  
programming take place. The words at the left  
side of the top line of the display show the  
button that is being programmed (e.g., the  
Power On Button  
Buttons ) and the indication at the right  
side of the top line shows the number of  
macro steps available of 20 possible steps.  
Following the instructions on the remote’s  
LCD screen, press the first key you wish to be  
transmitted in the macro. In our example, we  
first want the AVR to turn on, so the Power  
2. The remote’s MAIN MENU message (Figure  
16), will appear in the LCD display and the  
Set Button  
red. Press the Navigation Buttons  
three times so that MACRO appears on the  
bottom line of the LCD screen, as shown in  
Figure 37. Press the Set Button  
the main macro menu branch.  
Fwill remain illuminated in  
E
Erasing a Macro  
3
or one of the Macro  
Once a macro has been created and stored in  
the AVR remote’s memory, you have the option  
of erasing it. You may do this at any time by fol-  
lowing these steps:  
U
F
to enter  
3. At the next menu screen (Figure 46) press the  
⁄¤  
Navigation Buttons  
E
until the  
1. Press and hold the Program Button  
about three seconds while the message  
shown in Figure 15 appears in the remote’s  
LCD Information Display . Release the  
button when the red light under the Set  
Button appears.  
a
for  
bottom line in the remote’s LCD display shows  
READ A MACRO, as shown in Figure 46.  
Press the Set Button  
process of erasing a macro.  
F
to begin the  
Button  
3
should be pressed.  
2
P O W E R O N  
0 0 / 2 0  
F
M A C R O  
S E L E C T K E Y P R E S S  
R E A D  
A
M A C R O  
2. The remote’s MAIN MENU message (Figure  
16), will appear in the LCD display and the  
Figure 42  
Figure 46  
Set Button  
red. Press the Navigation Buttons  
three times so that MACRO appears on the  
Fwill remain illuminated in  
8. Once the first command button for the macro  
has been pressed, continue to press the but-  
tons you wish to be part of the macro, in the  
E
50 PROGRAMMING THE REMOTE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming the Remote  
4. The next display screen (Figure 47) is where  
you select the macro to be read. Press the  
⁄¤  
Set Button  
F
⁄¤  
will remain illuminated in  
Navigation Buttons  
steps shown above, except that in Steps 4 and 5,  
select the same device for both the DEVICE IN  
USE on the left side of the bottom line and the  
PUNCH-THROUGH device. In the example used,  
the display to return the remote to default set-  
tings will appear as shown in Figure 53.  
red. Press the  
until PUNCH-THROUGH appears on the  
bottom line of the LCD screen, as shown in  
Figure 48. Press the Set Button to enter  
Navigation Buttons  
E
until the  
E
name of the macro you wish to read appears.  
For this example, we will read back the Power  
On macro created in the previous section.  
When the name of the macro to be erased  
F
the main punch-through menu branch.  
M A I N M E N U  
P U N C H - T H R O U G H  
appears, press the Set Button  
F.  
P U N C H - T H R O U G H  
T V <- T V  
R E A D  
A
M A C R O  
Figure 48  
Figure 53  
P O W E R O N  
3. At the next menu screen (Figure 49) press the  
Channel Punch-Through  
Figure 47  
Set Button  
F
to begin programming the  
Channel punch-through allows the Channel  
Up/Down buttons to send commands to a differ-  
ent device than the one that has been selected  
for other commands. For example, you may wish  
to use a cable box or satellite receiver as the  
source for a VCR, so you would want the  
5. As soon as the Set button is pressed, the first  
two steps in the macro will be appear in the  
remote’s LCD screen. You may then use the  
⁄¤  
remote for Volume punch-through.  
P U N C H - T H R O U G H  
V O L U M E  
Navigation Buttons  
E
to step up or  
down through the list of commands stored as  
the macro. As you read the display, you will  
see Device Selector Buttons 45  
appear in brackets, (e.g., [AVR]). When the  
step in the macro is a function, navigation or  
any other button, it will appear next to the  
bracketed read-out of the underlying device  
(e.g., [AVR] POWER ON).  
Figure 49  
Channel Up/Down Selectors  
f
to transmit  
4. The next display screen (Figure 50) is where  
you select the device that will receive the  
punch-through commands. In our example,  
that is the VID 2/TV button, as that is where  
we want the AVR’s volume controls to be  
⁄¤  
commands to the cable box even though the  
other button commands are programmed to  
operate the VCR.  
To program the AVR for Channel punch-through,  
follow these steps. This example will show how  
to program channel punch-through so that the  
commands programmed for Channel Up/Down  
for the VID 3/ Cable device will be transmitted  
when the VID 1/VCR device has been selected as  
the current device.  
active. Press the  
Navigation Buttons  
E
until the name of the base device appears  
6. When you are finished reviewing the macro’s  
contents, press the Set Button  
the remote to normal operation.  
and then press the Set Button  
F.  
F
to return  
D E V I C E I N U S E  
T V  
Punch-Through Configuration  
Figure 50  
1. Press and hold the Program Button  
a
for  
Punch-through is a capability of the remote that  
allows the Volume controls, Channel Up/Down  
buttons or Transport keys (Play, Stop, Record, Fast  
Forward and Reverse, and Skip Up/Down) to link  
to a different device. For example, if your TV,  
cable box or satellite receiver is connected  
through the AVR you will most likely want to use  
the AVR’s volume control commands even when  
the remote has been set to issue all other com-  
mands for the video device. “Punch-through”  
enables you to easily program the remote to do  
this.  
about three seconds while the message shown  
in Figure 15 appears in the remote’s LCD  
5. At the next display screen (Figure 51), you will  
select the device whose Volume Up/Down and  
Mute commands will be used. Press the  
Information Display  
ton when the red light under the Set Button  
appears.  
2. Release the but-  
⁄¤  
Navigation Buttons  
E
until the desired  
F
device’s name appears to the right of the  
device in use. In our example, that is the AVR  
(indicated by AVR). When the desired  
2. The remote’s MAIN MENU message (Figure  
16), will appear in the LCD display and the  
combination of devices appears, press the Set  
Set Button  
F
⁄¤  
will remain illuminated in  
Navigation Buttons  
Button  
F.  
red. Press the  
until PUNCH-THROUGH appears on the  
bottom line of the LCD screen, as shown in  
Figure 48. Press the Set Button to enter  
the main punch-through menu branch.  
E
P U N C H - T H R O U G H  
T V <- A V R  
F
Volume Punch-Through  
Figure 51  
Follow these steps to enable the Volume  
Up/Down and Mute controls from one device to  
be used when the remote is otherwise pro-  
grammed for a different device.  
⁄¤  
3. At the next menu screen, press the  
Navigation Buttons until CHANNEL  
6. When the Set button is pressed, the display  
will change to show you that the new combi-  
nation of control commands is being saved to  
the unit’s memory, as shown in Figure 52. The  
word SAVED will flash four times and then  
the remote will return to normal operation.  
E
appears on the bottom line of the LCD screen,  
as shown in Figure 54. Press the Set Button  
Note for Volume Punch-Through:  
F
to begin programming the remote for  
The remote’s default settings are for the AVR’s  
volume controls to be used when any input or  
device is selected with the exception of the VID  
2/TV button. There is no need to program the  
remote for volume punch-through for the AVR’s  
controls with other sources, such as DVD. To have  
the AVR’s volume commands used when the TV  
device is selected, follow these steps:  
Channel punch-through.  
P U N C H - T H R O U G H  
C H A N N E L  
T V < - A V R [ V O L ]  
S A V E D  
Figure 54  
Figure 52  
4. The next display screen (Figure 55) is where  
you select the device that will receive the  
punch-through commands. In our example,  
that is the VID 1/VCR button, as that is where  
we want the cable box’s channel controls to  
⁄¤  
7. Once the punch-through is programmed, the  
Volume Up/Down and Mute buttons of the  
second device named will be used when those  
buttons dgare pressed while the master  
device is in use.  
1. Press and hold the Program Button  
a
for  
about three seconds while the message shown  
in Figure 15 appears in the remote’s LCD  
be active. Press the  
Buttons  
device appears and then press the Set  
Button  
Navigation  
until the name of the base  
Returning the Volume Control Settings to  
Default Operation:  
If you wish to remove the Volume punch-through  
so that the commands for Volume and Mute are  
returned to the factory default setting, follow the  
Information Display  
2. Release the button  
E
when the red light under the Set Button  
F
appears.  
F
.
2. The remote’s MAIN MENU message (Figure  
16), will appear in the LCD display and the  
PROGRAMMING THE REMOTE 51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming the Remote  
2. The remote’s MAIN MENU message (Figure  
16), will appear in the LCD display and the  
Returning the Transport Control Settings  
to Default Operation:  
D E V I C E I N U S E  
V C R  
Set Button  
F
⁄¤  
will remain illuminated in  
Navigation Buttons  
If you wish to remove the Transport Punch-  
Through so that the transport commands are  
returned to the factory default setting, follow the  
steps shown above, except that in Steps 4 and 5,  
select the same device for both the DEVICE IN  
USE on the left side of the bottom line and the  
PUNCH-THROUGH device. In the example used,  
the display to return the remote to default set-  
tings will appear as shown in Figure 63.  
Figure 55  
red. Press the  
until PUNCH-THROUGH appears on the  
bottom line of the LCD screen, as shown in  
Figure 48. Press the Set Button to enter  
the main punch-through menu branch.  
E
5. At the next display screen (Figure 56), you will  
select the device whose Channel Up/Down  
commands will be used. Press the  
F
⁄¤  
Navigation Buttons  
E
until the desired  
⁄¤  
3. At the next menu screen, press the  
Navigation Buttons until TRANS-  
device name appears to the right of the device  
in use. In our example, that is the cable box.  
When the desired combination of devices  
E
PORT appears on the bottom line of the LCD  
appears, press the Set Button  
F.  
screen, as shown in Figure 59. Press the Set  
P U N C H - T H R O U G H  
Button  
F
to begin programming the  
T V < - T V  
P U N C H - T H R O U G H  
remote for transport punch-through.  
V C R <- C B L  
Figure 63  
P U N C H - T H R O U G H  
T R A N S P O R T  
Figure 56  
Renaming  
6. When the Set button is pressed, the display  
will change to show you that the new combi-  
nation of control commands is being saved to  
the unit’s memory, as shown in Figure 57. The  
word SAVED will flash four times and then  
the remote will return to normal operation.  
Figure 59  
While the names given to the buttons and inputs  
on the AVR represent recognizable categories of  
audio/ video products, system operation may be  
easier if the displays shown in the remote’s LCD  
screen are customized to reflect the specific char-  
acteristics of a playback source’s brand name or  
the new function given to a specific button when  
one remote’s controls are programmed into the  
AVR remote. The AVR remote allows you to  
change the name of either a master device or  
any button on the remote using the following  
steps.  
4. The next display screen (Figure 60) is where  
you select the device that will receive the  
punch-through commands. In our example,  
that is the TV button, as that is where we want  
the VCR’s transport controls to be active. Press  
⁄¤  
V C R < - C B L [ C H A N ]  
S A V E D  
the  
Navigation Buttons  
E
until the  
name of the base device appears and then  
press the Set Button  
F.  
Figure 57  
7. Once the punch-through is programmed, the  
channel up/down buttons of the second device  
named will be used when those buttons  
D E V I C E I N U S E  
T V  
f
Renaming a Device  
Figure 60  
are pressed while the master device is in use.  
To rename a specific device/input source button,  
follow these steps. For this example, we will  
show you how to rename the Device/Input  
Selector normally shown as “TV” to “HDTV  
TUNER.”  
5. At the next display screen (Figure 61), you will  
select the device whose transport commands  
⁄¤  
Returning the Channel Control Settings to  
Default Operation:  
will be used. Press the  
Navigation  
If you wish to remove the Channel Punch-  
Through so that the commands for Channel  
Up/Down are returned to the factory default set-  
ting, follow the steps shown above, except that  
in Steps 4 and 5, select the same device for both  
the DEVICE IN USE on the left side of the bot-  
tom line and the PUNCH-THROUGH device. In  
the example used, the display to return the  
remote to default settings will appear as shown  
in Figure 58.  
Buttons  
E
until the desired device name  
appears to the right of the device in use. In our  
example, that is the VCR. When the desired  
combination of devices appears, press the Set  
1. Press and hold the Program Button  
about three seconds while the message shown  
in Figure 15 appears in the remote’s LCD  
a
for  
Button  
F.  
Information Display  
ton when the red light under the Set Button  
appears.  
2. Release the but-  
P U N C H - T H R O U G H  
T V <- V C R  
F
Figure 61  
2. The remote’s MAIN MENU message (Figure  
16), will appear in the LCD display and the  
Set Button  
red. Press the  
6. When the Set button is pressed, the display  
will change to show you that the new combi-  
nation of control commands is being saved to  
the unit’s memory, as shown in Figure 62. The  
word SAVED will flash four times and then  
the remote will return to normal operation.  
P U N C H - T H R O U G H  
F
⁄¤  
will remain illuminated in  
Navigation Buttons  
V C R <- V C R  
E
until RENAME appears on the bottom  
Figure 58  
line of the LCD screen, as shown in Figure 66.  
Transport Punch-Through  
Transport punch-through allows the Play  
Stop , Fast Forward/Reverse , Pause  
, Record and Skip Up/Down but-  
tons to send commands to a different device  
P
,
M A I N M E N U  
R E N A M E  
P
P
T V <- V C R [ T R S ]  
S A V E D  
P
P
R
Figure 66  
⁄¤  
Figure 62  
3. At the next menu screen press the  
Navigation Buttons  
DEVICE appears on the bottom line of the  
LCD screen, as shown in Figure 67. Press the  
than the one that has been selected for other  
commands. For example, you may wish to oper-  
ate the transport of a second VCR you have con-  
nected to the VID 2/TV input, as shown in the  
following example.  
E
until RENAME  
7. Once the punch-through is programmed, the  
transport buttons of the second device named  
will be used when those buttons are pressed  
while the master device is in use.  
Set Button  
F
to begin renaming a device.  
1. Press and hold the Program Button  
about three seconds while the message shown  
a
for  
R E N A M E  
R E N A M E D E V I C E  
in Figure 15 appears in the remote’s LCD  
Figure 67  
Information Display  
ton when the red light under the Set Button  
appears.  
2. Release the but-  
F
52 PROGRAMMING THE REMOTE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming the Remote  
4. The next display screen (Figure 68) is where  
you select the device that will be renamed. In  
our example, that is the TV button. Press the  
⁄¤  
9. When the text entry is complete, press the  
Set Button . The LCD display will blink  
DEVICE RENAMED three times and then  
screen, as shown in Figure 69. Press the Set  
Button to continue.  
F
F
R E N A M E  
Navigation Buttons  
E
until the  
return to normal operation.  
R E N A M E K E Y  
name of the base device appears and then  
press the Set Button  
Once a device is renamed you will see the new  
name on the top line of the remote’s LCD display  
F
.
Figure 69  
whenever the Input/Device Selector  
4
is  
4. The next display screen (Figure 70) is where  
you select the device within which the key to  
be renamed exists. Press the  
R E N A M E D E V I C E  
T V  
pressed, or when any other command/function  
button on the remote is pressed after the main  
Device Selector is pressed. Note that renaming a  
device in the remote will not change the name of  
the input used by the on-screen menu system of  
the AVR.  
⁄¤  
Figure 68  
Navigation Buttons  
E
until the name of  
5. At the next menu screen you will see the  
device name on the bottom line of the display  
with a blinking cursor box to the right of the  
the base device appears. In our example, since  
we want to rename a button within the DVD  
device memory, DVD should appear in the  
lower line of the LCD. When the desired device  
device name. Press the Navigation  
Notes on Renaming Devices:  
• To move the cursor to the right or left of the  
display during the renaming process, press the  
‹ ›  
Buttons  
E
to return the blinking cursor to  
name appears, press the Set Button  
F.  
the far left side of the display line. You may  
then retitle the device name as shown in the  
next step.  
S E L E C T  
D V D  
A
D E V I C E  
/
Navigation Buttons  
E
as required.  
• The table below shows the letters, numbers  
and characters that may be accessed by press-  
ing the Numeric Keys:  
Figure 70  
6. To enter the new name, press the Numeric  
Keys  
H. The letters above the numbered  
5. At the next menu screen you will select the  
first button within the device to be renamed,  
as instructed in the display shown in Figure  
71. Select the button by simply pressing it on  
the remote.  
buttons indicate which letter or symbol will  
appear when the button is pressed during the  
renaming process. The first press of the button  
will enter the first letter shown, subsequent  
presses of the same button will change the  
display to the other letters above that num-  
bered key. For example, since the first letter we  
need to rename the input to HDTV Tuner is an  
“H”, you would locate the “H” above the “4”  
button, and press the button twice. The first  
press shows a “G,” the second press changes  
it to an “H.” Consult the table at the end of  
this section to see which characters pressing a  
particular button generates.  
Key  
1
2
3
4
Characters Key  
Characters  
M,N,O,6  
P,Q,R,S,7  
T,U,V,8  
W,X,Y,Z,9  
-,.,#,0  
[,],/,1  
6
7
8
9
0
A,B,C,2  
D,E,F,3  
G,H,I,4  
J,K,L,5  
S E L E C T  
A
K E Y  
5
• Renaming a device changes the name of the  
device only, not any of the individual key func-  
tions within that device memory. To change the  
name of an individual device, follow the  
instructions in the next section.  
Figure 71  
6. Depending on whether or not the button  
pressed already has a named function within  
the device selected, one of two things will  
happen.  
Renaming Individual Keys  
a. If the button to be renamed already has a  
pre-programmed, or previously renamed  
title in the remote’s memory, you will see  
that name on the top line of the LCD dis-  
play, and a blinking block cursor will appear  
on the far left side of the bottom line of the  
display, as shown in Figure 72.  
Thanks to the programming flexibility of the AVR  
remote, an individual button on the remote may  
be assigned a feature or function that is different  
from the name that appears as the factory  
default when the button is pressed. However,  
with the Rename Key function it is possible to  
rename almost any button on the remote so that  
when the button is pressed you will see a more  
descriptive or appropriate name displayed.  
7. After you enter the first letter of the new  
device name, there are three options for enter-  
ing the next character:  
a. To enter a letter that requires a different  
numeric key to be pressed, simply press that  
button. The cursor will automatically move  
to the next position and the first letter  
accessed by the new button will appear.  
Following our example, the next letter need-  
ed is a “D,” so you would press the “3”  
button once.  
b. If the button to be renamed does not have a  
function in the device selected, the top line  
of the LCD screen will be blank, and a blink-  
ing block cursor will appear on the far left  
side of the bottom line of the display, as  
shown in Figure 73.  
To rename a specific button on the remote, fol-  
low these steps. For this example, we will show  
you how to rename the Tone Control Button  
i
, which is normally not used when DVD is  
b. To enter a letter that uses the same numeric  
key, you must first press the Navigation  
selected so that it reads ZOOM in the remote’s  
display.  
D I S C S K I P  
Buttons  
E
to move the blinking cursor  
block to the next position. Then press the  
1. Press and hold the Program Button  
about three seconds while the message shown  
a
for  
Figure 72  
Numeric Key  
H
as required to enter the  
desired letter.  
in Figure 15 appears in the remote’s LCD  
Information Display  
ton when the red light under the Set Button  
appears.  
2. Release the but-  
c. To enter a blank space, press the  
Navigation Buttons  
E
twice. The first  
F
Figure 73  
press will move the cursor to the right, and  
the second press will move the cursor one  
more space to the right, leaving a blank  
space between the last letter and the next  
one.  
2. The remote’s MAIN MENU message (Figure  
16), will appear in the LCD display and the  
7. To enter the new name for the key, press the  
Numeric Keys  
numbered buttons indicate which letters or  
symbols will appear when the button is  
pressed during the renaming process. The first  
press of the button will enter the first charac-  
ter shown, subsequent presses of the same  
button will change the display to the other let-  
ters above that numbered key. For example,  
H. The letters above the  
Set Button  
red. Press the  
F
⁄¤  
will remain illuminated in  
Navigation Buttons  
E
until RENAME appears on the bottom  
8. Repeat Step 7 as needed to enter all the  
needed letters, numbers, characters and  
spaces.  
line of the LCD screen, as shown in Figure 66.  
⁄¤  
3. At the next menu screen press the  
Navigation Buttons  
E
until RENAME  
KEY appears on the bottom line of the LCD  
PROGRAMMING THE REMOTE 53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming the Remote  
since the first letter we need to rename the  
Tone button to Zoom is a “Z,” so you would  
locate the “Z” above the “9” button, and  
press the button four times. The first press  
shows a “W,” the subsequent presses step  
through the other letters available until the  
“Z” appears. Consult the table on this page to  
see which characters are available by pressing  
a particular button.  
Notes on Renaming Keys:  
4. When the remote has been totally reset and  
returned to the factory default condition, a  
REMOTE RESET COMPLETE message will  
appear (Figure 76) briefly, and then the remote  
will return to normal operation.  
• Renaming a key does not change its function.  
You may change the function of an individual  
key by learning a new code into the remote.  
See page 34 for more information.  
• When a key is renamed it will only apply to the  
specific device selected in Step 4. The same key  
may be renamed as needed for each individual  
device with which it is used.  
R E M O T E R E S E T  
C O M P L E T E  
Figure 76  
8. After you enter the first letter of the new  
device name, there are three options for  
entering the next character:  
Backlight Options  
Resetting the Remote  
The AVR 635’s remote has a built-in backlight  
system that makes it easier to use the remote  
when the room lighting is dimmed for an optimal  
home theater experience. To turn the backlight-  
Depending on the way in which the remote has  
been programmed, there may be a situation  
where you wish to totally erase all changes that  
have been made to the remote and return it to  
the factory defaults. You may do that by follow-  
ing the steps shown below, but remember that  
once the remote is reset, ALL changes that have  
been made, including programming for use with  
other devices, learned keys, macros, punch-  
through settings and key names, will be erased  
and any settings you had previously made will  
have to be reentered.  
a. To enter a letter that requires a different  
numeric key to be pressed, simply press that  
button. The cursor will automatically move  
to the next position and the first letter  
accessed by the new button will appear.  
Following our example, the next letter need-  
ed is an “O,” so you would press the “6”  
button once.  
ing on, simply press the Light Button  
Q. That  
button is made from a special “glow” material  
that makes it easier to find in dark rooms. This  
glow feature does not use any battery power, so  
the glow will fade when the remote is kept in a  
dark room for an extended period of time. You  
may “recharge” it by placing the remote in nor-  
mal room lighting for a few hours.  
b. To enter a letter that uses the same numeric  
key, you must first press the Navigation  
Buttons  
block to the next position. Then press the  
Numeric Key as required to enter the  
E
to move the blinking cursor  
To erase all settings and reset the remote to the  
original factory default settings and displays, fol-  
low these steps:  
Once the Light Button  
Q
is pressed, the  
H
remote’s backlighting will remain on for approxi-  
mately 7 seconds, and when you press any but-  
ton on the remote while the backlighting is on,  
the light will stay on for another 7 seconds.  
However, the remote’s “Couch” function will  
conserve battery power by turning both the back-  
lighting and the LCD display off when any button  
is pressed for more than 30 seconds.  
desired letter. This is the way you would  
enter the second “O” in the word ZOOM,  
and again for the letter “M.”  
1. Press and hold the Program Button  
about three seconds while the message shown  
in Figure 15 appears in the remote’s LCD  
a
for  
c. To enter a blank space, press the  
Navigation Buttons  
E
twice. The first  
Information Display  
ton when the red light under the Set Button  
appears.  
2. Release the but-  
press will move the cursor to the right, and  
the second press will move the cursor one  
more space to the right, leaving a blank  
space between the last letter and the next  
one.  
F
2. The remote’s MAIN MENU message (Figure  
16), will appear in the LCD display and the  
You may also configure the remote so that the  
backlighting will come on, any time a button is  
pressed.  
Set Button  
red. Press the  
F
⁄¤  
will remain illuminated in  
Navigation Buttons  
9. Repeat Steps 7 and 8 as needed to complete  
entering the needed letters, numbers, charac-  
ters and spaces.  
To set this option, follow these steps:  
E
until USER RESET appears on the bot-  
tom line of the LCD screen, as shown in Figure  
74.  
1. Press and hold the Program Button  
a
for  
about 3 seconds while the message shown in  
Figure 24 appears in the remote’s LCD display.  
Release the button when the red light under  
10. When the text entry is complete, press the  
Set Button  
F. The new name will be  
M A I N M E N U  
entered into the remote’s memory, replacing  
the default name.  
U S E R R E S E T  
the Set Button  
F
appears.  
Figure 74  
2. When the remote’s Main Menu message (Fig.  
25) appears in the LCD display and the Set  
11. At this point you have two options:  
3. Press the Set Button  
F
to reset the  
a. If you wish to program an additional key  
within the same device, press the Set  
remote. Note that once the Set Button is  
pressed the process may not be stopped. While  
the remote’s memory is being cleared a  
RESETTING... message will appear in the  
upper line of the remote’s LCD screen as  
shown in Figure 75.  
It may take a few minutes for the reset process  
to take place, and the length of time will vary  
depending on how much customization and  
programming has taken place. Please be  
patient; as long as the message appears in the  
display the remote is functioning properly.  
Button  
the  
F
remains illuminated in red, press  
⁄¤  
Navigation Buttons until  
E
Button  
F
as instructed by the bottom  
BACKLIGHTappears in the bottom line  
of the LCD screen, as shown in Figure 77.  
line of the LCD display reading ANOTHER  
KEY. The remote will return to the SELECT  
A KEY menu option as shown in Step 6.  
Repeat the instructions in Steps 6 though  
11 to rename the next key.  
M A I N M E N U  
B A C K L I G H T  
Figure 77  
b. If you have no additional keys to rename,  
press the Navigation Buttons  
E
3. Press the Set Button  
F
and then press  
again so  
once so that the menu screen displays EXIT  
on the bottom line of the display. Press the  
⁄¤  
the  
Navigation Buttons  
E
that ONFULLappears in the bottom line of  
the LCD display, as shown in Figure 78.  
Set Button  
F
to return the remote to  
R E S E T T I N G . . .  
normal operation.  
B A C K L I G H T  
O N F U L L  
Figure 75  
Figure 78  
54 PROGRAMMING THE REMOTE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming the Remote  
4. Press the Set Button  
F
one more time. The  
• When the batteries approach a level below  
which the remote will not function, the  
remote’s LCD screen will display a LOW  
BATTERY warning as shown in Figure 80. We  
strongly recommend replacing the batteries as  
soon as this message appears to avoid the loss  
of programming and configuration settings.  
These settings are not lost when the batteries  
are changed quickly.  
LCD display will show the word SAVING on  
the top line for about 2 seconds and then flash  
SAVEDfour times on the bottom line to  
indicate that the setting has been accepted by  
the remote’s memory.  
5. The remote’s backlighting will now turn on  
whenever a button is pressed. To revert to the  
original setting, follow the four steps shown  
above, but in Step 3, select the option that has  
the word NORMALon the bottom line of the  
LCD display.  
A V R  
L O W B A T T E R Y  
Figure 80  
• The remote has a built-in backlight that may be  
activated by pressing the Light Button  
This button is made from a special “glow”  
material so that it is easier to find in dark  
rooms. This glow feature does not consume any  
electricity, but the glow will fade when the  
remote is kept in a dark location for an extend-  
ed period of time. The “glow” feature may be  
restored by placing the remote in normal room  
light for a few hours.  
Q.  
Additional Notes on Configuring and  
Operating the Remote:  
• When the remote is being programmed, it will  
automatically time-out if no button is pressed  
within a thirty-second period. The message  
shown in Figure 79 will appear briefly, and the  
remote will then exit the feature being pro-  
grammed and any data entered will be lost.  
T I M E O U T O R  
• The remote’s backlight will remain lit for  
C L R K E Y P R E S S E D  
approximately five seconds after the Light  
Figure 79  
Button  
Q
is pressed, and it will stay lit for  
another five seconds if any key is pressed while  
the backlight is on. You may keep the backlight  
lit by holding the Light Button, but extensive  
use of the backlight will reduce battery life.  
• The programming or configuration process may  
also be stopped at any time by pressing the  
Clear Button  
X. The message shown in  
Figure 79 will appear, the data entered in the  
current process will be lost and the remote will  
return to normal operation. Any process that  
was underway when the button will be pressed  
must be re-started.  
• The LCD display will remain on for ten seconds  
after a key is pressed and then turn off to con-  
serve battery life.  
• When any button is held for more than thirty  
seconds the LCD will turn off and the remote  
will stop transmitting the codes to conserve  
battery life.  
• Extensive use of the programming, learning  
and configuration functions of the remote may  
consume significantly more battery power than  
normal remote operation. While the batteries  
should last for four to six months in normal  
operation, you may find that they need to be  
changed sooner after the remote is pro-  
grammed for the first time.  
PROGRAMMING THE REMOTE 55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting Guide  
SYMPTOM  
CAUSE  
SOLUTION  
Unit does not function when Main  
• No AC Power  
• Make certain AC power cord is plugged  
into a live outlet  
Power Switch  
1
is pushed  
• Check to see if outlet is switch controlled  
Display lights, but no sound  
or picture  
• Intermittent input connections  
• Make certain that all input and speaker  
connections are secure  
Mute is on  
• Press Mute button  
g
• Volume control is down  
• Turn up volume control  
Units turns on, but Front-Panel  
Display does not light  
• Display brightness is turned off  
• Follow the instructions in the Display Brightness section  
on page 41 so that the display is set to VFDFULL  
No sound from any speaker;  
light around Power switch  
• Amplifier is in protection mode  
due to possible short  
• Check speaker-wire connections for shorts at receiver  
and speaker ends  
2
is red  
• Amplifier is in protection mode  
due to internal problems  
• Contact your local Harman Kardon service depot  
No sound from surround or  
center speakers  
• Incorrect surround mode  
• Input is mono  
• Select a mode other than Stereo  
• There is no surround information from mono sources (except with  
Theater and Hall surround modes)  
• Incorrect configuration  
• Check speaker mode configuration  
• Stereo or Mono program material  
• Some surround modes may not create rear-channel information  
from nonencoded programs  
Unit does not respond to  
remote commands  
• Weak batteries in remote  
• Wrong device selected  
• Change remote batteries  
• Press the AVR Selector  
5
Remote sensor  
¯
is obscured  
• Make certain front-panel sensor is visible to remote or  
connect remote sensor  
Intermittent buzzing in tuner  
• Local interference  
• Move unit or antenna away from computers, fluorescent lights,  
motors or other electrical appliances  
Letters flash in the Channel Indicator • Digital audio feed paused  
Display and Digital Audio stops  
• Resume play for DVD  
• Check that Digital Signal is fed to the Digital Input selected  
Ú
HDCD encoded disc does not trigger  
HDCD indicator  
• Surround mode in use  
• Analog feed in use  
• Select “Surround Off” mode  
• Connect and select digital connection to CD player  
To clear the AVR’s entire system memory includ-  
ing tuner presets, output level settings, delay  
times and speaker configuration data, first put  
NOTE: Resetting the processor will erase any  
configuration settings you have made for  
speakers, output levels, surround modes, digital  
input assignments as well as the tuner presets.  
After a reset the unit will be returned to the  
factory presets, and all settings for these items  
must be reentered.  
Processor Reset  
In the rare case where the unit’s operation or the  
displays seem abnormal, the cause may involve  
the erratic operation of the system’s memory or  
microprocessor.  
the unit in Standby by pressing the System  
Power Control button  
2. Next, press the  
Surround Mode  
5
and the RDS buttons  
^
simultaneously.  
To correct this problem, first unplug the unit from  
the AC wall outlet and wait at least three  
minutes. After the pause, reconnect the AC  
power cord and check the unit’s operation. If the  
system still malfunctions, a system reset may  
clear the problem.  
The unit will turn on automatically and display  
the RESETmessage in the Main Infor-  
If the system is still operating incorrectly, there  
may have been an electronic discharge or severe  
AC line interference that has corrupted the  
memory or microprocessor.  
mation Display  
˜. Note that once you have  
cleared the memory in this manner, it is necessary  
to re-establish all system configuration settings  
and tuner presets.  
If these steps do not solve the problem, consult  
an authorized Harman Kardon service depot.  
56 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Technical Specifications  
Audio Section  
Stereo Mode  
FM Tuner Section  
Frequency Range  
87.5108MHz  
IHF 1.3 µV/13.2dBf  
Mono/Stereo: 70/68dB (DIN)  
Mono/Stereo: 0.15/0.2%  
40dB @ 1kHz  
400kHz: 70dB  
80dB  
90dB  
Continuous Average Power (FTC)  
Usable Sensitivity  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio  
Distortion  
Stereo Separation  
Selectivity  
90 Watts per channel, 20Hz–20kHz,  
@ < 0.07% THD, both channels driven into 8 ohms  
5/7 Channel Surround Modes  
Power Per Individual Channel  
Image Rejection  
IF Rejection  
Front L&R channels:  
75 Watts per channel,  
@ < 0.07% THD, 20Hz–20kHz into 8 ohms  
AM Tuner Section  
Frequency Range  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio  
Usable Sensitivity  
Distortion  
520–1710kHz  
45dB  
Loop: 500µV  
1kHz, 50% Mod: 0.8%  
10kHz: 30dB  
Center channel:  
75 Watts, @ < 0.07% THD, 20Hz–20kHz into 8 ohms  
Surround (L & R Side, L & R Back) channels:  
75 Watts per channel,  
@ < 0.07% THD, 20Hz–20kHz into 8 ohms  
Selectivity  
Input Sensitivity/Impedance  
Video Section  
Linear (High Level)  
200mV/47kohms  
95dB  
Video Format  
PAL/NTSC  
1Vp-p/75 ohms  
1Vp-p/75 ohms  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio (IHF-A)  
Input Level/Impedance  
Output Level/Impedance  
Video Frequency Response  
(Composite and S-Video) 10Hz–8MHz (–3dB)  
Video Frequency  
Surround System Adjacent Channel Separation  
Analog Decoding  
(Pro Logic, etc.)  
Dolby Digital (AC-3)  
DTS  
40dB  
55dB  
55dB  
Response (Component)  
10Hz-50MHz (-3dB)  
Frequency Response  
@ 1W (+0dB, –3dB)  
10Hz130kHz  
50 Amps  
General  
Power Requirement  
Power Consumption  
AC 220-240V/50Hz  
High Instantaneous  
Current Capability (HCC)  
59W idle, 1040W maximum  
(7 channels driven)  
Transient Intermodulation  
Distortion (TIM)  
Dimensions (Max)  
Width  
Unmeasurable  
16 µsec  
440mm  
165mm  
435mm  
18.6 kg  
Rise Time  
Slew Rate  
Height  
Depth  
Weight  
40V/µsec**  
Depth measurement includes knobs, buttons and terminal connections.  
Height measurement includes feet and chassis.  
All features and specifications are subject to change without notice.  
Supplied Accessories  
The following accessory items are supplied with the AVR 635.  
If any of these items are missing, please contact Harman Kardon  
Harman Kardon and Power for the Digital Revolution are registered trademarks of  
Harman International Industries, Incorporated.  
• A system remote control  
• A Zone II remote control  
is a trademark of Harman International Industries, Inc.  
(Patent No. 5,386,478).  
• An  
microphone  
*Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.  
• Extender rod for microphone  
• An AM loop antenna  
• An FM wire antenna  
• Six AAA batteries  
“Dolby,” “Pro Logic,” “Pro Logic II,” "Pro Logix IIx" and the Double-D symbol are  
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Confidential Unpublished  
Works. ©1992–1999 Dolby Laboratories, Inc. All rights reserved.  
DTS and DTS Surround, DTS-ES and DTS Neo:6 are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.  
Logic 7 is a registered trademark of Harman International Industries, Incorporated.  
HDCD is a registered trademark of Pacific Microsonics, Inc.  
A-BUS and A-BUS Ready are registered trademarks of Leisure Tech Electronics Pty Ltd Australia.  
TiVo is a registered trademark of TiVo, Inc.  
Replay TV is a registered trademark of Digital Networks North America, Inc.  
**Without input anti slewing and output isolation networks.  
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
250 Crossways Park Drive, Woodbury, New York 11797  
Harman Consumer Group International:  
2, route de Tours, 72500 Château-du-Loir, France  
© 2005 Harman Kardon, Incorporated  
Part No.: ZKD2101HA00-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Miele Coffeemaker CVA615 User Manual
Milwaukee Saw 6180 20 User Manual
Mr Handsfree GPS Receiver 020386 User Manual
Murphy Switch DF Series User Manual
NordicTrack Treadmill NTL15940 User Manual
Nortec Humidifier GS Series User Manual
Panasonic Air Conditioner CS E24EKRS User Manual
Panasonic Cell Phone A100 User Manual
Panasonic Cordless Telephone KXTG6842B User Manual
Panasonic Electric Shaver ES107 User Manual